JP2017192644A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game suitably.SOLUTION: Second hold information is acquired by allowing game balls to enter a second operation hole provided in a game area. A big win result is selectable and a small win result is selectable when winning/losing determination processing is executed on the second hold information. Opening/closing control of a special electric winning device is executed in the big win result or the small win result, and putout of the game balls is executed when they enter the special electric winning device. In this case, a through game is provided at a downstream side of the special electric winning device, and the special electric winning device is opened and closed in a situation in which the game balls are placed on an opening/closing member to allow the game balls to enter the through gate. When the game balls enter the through gate, the hold information at a normal pattern side is acquired, and the second operation hole is opened with the hold information at the normal pattern side as an opportunity.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a profit is given to a player by shifting a gaming state to a special control state based on a predetermined transition condition being established.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special control state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball entering a part. And when it shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the pitching device provided in the gaming area is started, and the gaming ball is paid out based on the pitching into the pitching device (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-009055

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 prevents the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction by entering the first corresponding state and the game ball flowing down from the upstream side. A displacement portion that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction by being in a two-corresponding state;
In a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, so that the game ball flows in Special entrance means provided at a position where
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability determination table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability determination table for 1st special drawings, (c) No. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability determination table for 2 special drawings, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability determination table for 2nd special drawings. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the field in which the special electric prize winning device is provided. It is a perspective view of an opening / closing member. (A), (b) It is a perspective view of the channel | path formation body and opening / closing member which show a mode that the inlet_port | entrance part of a 4th discharge channel | path part is opened and closed by the opening / closing member. It is a top view of the drive part for an opening-and-closing member and special electricity. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the winning to a 2nd operating port generate | occur | produces in opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of (a), (b) opening-and-closing execution mode. (A1)-(b3) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of the opening-and-closing execution mode performed with having become a small hit result. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure normal power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed in main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed in the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed with main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. (A1)-(c2) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of the opening / closing execution mode in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball enters into a 1st special entrance or a 2nd special entrance in the opening / closing execution mode. It is a front view of the game board in 15th Embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) It is the BB sectional drawing of FIG. 78, (b) It is the AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability determination table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability determination table for 1st special drawings, (c) No. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability determination table for 2 special drawings, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability determination table for 2nd special drawings. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of (a), (b) opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the opening setting process for special electricity performed with the main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opening setting process for special electricity performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the closing setting process for special electricity performed by main side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a 1st special electricity winning device and a 2nd special electricity winning device are opened and closed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board for demonstrating the structure of the special electricity prize-winning apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow prevention control process performed in main side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening-and-closing state of each special electricity prize-winning apparatus, and the operation position of a flow-down prevention member. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the opening-and-closing state of each special electricity prize-winning apparatus, and the operation position of a flow-down prevention member. It is a front view of the game board in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information by the side of a common execution performed by main side CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display apparatus. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the pending | holding information by the side of a common map is acquired. It is a front view of the game board in a 19th embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is one game ball entering the first operation port 33 or one game ball entering the second operation port 34 is generated. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball is thrown into the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid out. When one game ball enters, 15 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The variable display unit 36 includes a symbol display device 41 having a square display surface, and a center frame 36 a so as to surround the periphery of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the center frame 36a, portions along the upper side, left side, and right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located at the center part of the game area PA. Is provided. Thereby, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located on the right side of the variable display unit 36. And a lower area PA4 positioned below the variable display unit 36. That is, the game ball launched into the game area PA first reaches the upper area PA1, but the game ball that has reached the upper area PA1 is in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. A game ball that flows down or flows in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4, and the game ball flowing down one of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 does not flow down the other.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in a lower area PA4 that is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2 which is the left area of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA and downstream thereof, and is the right area of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is continuous with the right area PA3 and downstream thereof. Therefore, even in the game area PA, a game ball that has flowed down from any position of the upper area PA1 that is an area above the variable display unit 36 can reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. . For example, the game ball can reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 even when the turning operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed so as to be the maximum operation amount. In addition, when a launch operation is performed aiming for a winning at the first working port 33, not only a winning at the first working port 33 can occur, but also a winning at the second working port 34 can occur. When a launch operation is performed aiming for a winning at the second working port 34, not only a winning at the second working port 34 can occur but also a winning at the first working port 33 can occur.

  The first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as a working port device in a state where the first working port 33 is arranged in the vertical direction so that the first working port 33 is above and the second working port 34 is below. Yes. When the first operation port 33 is not provided with a member for making the frequency of entering the game ball into the first operation port 33 different, the left region PA2 is compared in a predetermined manner in which the game ball flows down The probability of entering a game ball into the first working port 33 is the same in any game state. Therefore, the player can perform a launch operation aimed at entering the game ball into the first operation port 33 in any situation.

  A stage part 36c is provided in the lower frame part 36b, which is a part below the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a, so as to extend laterally above the first working port 33, A warp passage that allows a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36c in the left frame portion 36d, which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The inlet portion 36e is formed. A central portion in the lateral direction of the stage portion 36c exists vertically above the first working port 33, and a derivation portion 36f for deriving a game ball by its own weight to the lower portion of the stage portion 36c. Is formed. In this case, a game ball derived to the stage unit 36c and derived from an area other than the deriving unit 36f to the lower side of the stage unit 36c is difficult to enter the first operation port 33, but the deriving unit 36f The game ball led out to the lower side of the stage portion 36c enters the first working port 33 with a high probability.

  The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second working port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, more specifically, in the right area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display part 37a and a second special figure display part 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning drawing to the first working port 33 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a change in the pattern. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b are comprised by the segment indicator by which a some segment light emission part is arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b, the structure by which a multiple types of character is displayed, the structure by which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters A configuration in which is displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure hold display part 37c and a second special figure hold display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The maximum number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the maximum number of game balls won in the second operation port 34 is reserved, and the number of reserves is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning in the first operation port 33, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the second operation port When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the second special symbol display unit 37b based on the winning to 34, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly. In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is called.

  The display contents when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display surface.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface based on winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R high-accuracy result to be described later, a combination of “7” symbols is formed on one of the active lines, and the result of the internal lottery is displayed. If any of the 2R high accuracy results, 4R high accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, and 10R high accuracy results described later is used, the same odd number of symbols other than the “7” symbol combination is present on any effective line. If the result of the internal lottery is 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, or 16R low-accuracy result, which will be described later, on any active line If the same even symbol combination is formed and the result of the internal lottery is one of the following results, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result, on any active line It is not a combination of the same design and The combination of predetermined symbol nor a combination of switch symbols (e.g., "3, 4 and 1 ') is formed.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, display is started in any of the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, until a predetermined result is displayed and the display is ended. Corresponds to one game time. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33, the operation shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. In addition, when the winning lottery based on the winning at the second operating port 34 is a big win or a small winning win, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. As shown in FIG. 3, the special prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 in the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 cannot win the special electric prize device 32. For example, when the turning operation of the launch operation device 28 is performed so as to be the maximum operation amount, the right area When the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down on PA3, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

  As already described, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is any one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flow down through the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 that have flowed in, and are led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and become a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). Collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning port detection sensor 42 a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. A game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a in the middle of passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side of the game is entered. The ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning ports 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side region by joining the inlet side regions in the middle. doing. A third winning port detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and a game ball that has entered the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and a game ball that has entered the second operation port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and a game ball that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  In addition, the game ball which became a detection target by any one detection sensor 42a-48a among the various detection sensors 42a-48a does not become a detection target of the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a situation where a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal in a situation where a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box 60a, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are inseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the history of entering the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined in accordance with the determined winning history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 67 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various winning detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, second working port detection sensor 47a, out port detection sensor 48a, and gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding entry part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entry part. The Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b for opening / closing an open / close member 202 (to be described later) of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric drive unit 34b for opening / closing an electric utility item 34a of the second operating port 34. The special figure unit 37 and the universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display part 37a, a second special figure display part 37b, a first special figure reservation display part 37c, and a second special figure reservation display part 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is won, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the power drive unit 34b so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. . In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. Further, when a winning to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the main CPU 63 displays the special figure hold display unit 37c, When the display control of 37d is executed and a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the normal display unit 38a, the display control of the general figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63 Is done.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is connected to the main power supply unit. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display settings for the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, symbol display settings for the symbol display device 41, display settings for the general symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the deviation fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the fluctuation display on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display unit 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the period is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose service item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the general-purpose open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in the special figure holding area 65a. The special figure reservation area 65a includes a first special figure reservation area 85, a second special figure reservation area 86, and an execution area 87 for special drawings.

  The first special figure holding area 85 includes a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c, and a fourth area 85d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 85a to 85d as the hold information on the special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d, the first area 85a → the second area 85b → the third area 85c → the second area when the winning to the first working port 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 85d. Thus, by providing the four areas 85a to 85d, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 are held and stored. The number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The second special figure holding area 86 includes a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c, and a fourth area 86d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 86a to 86d as the hold information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 86a to the fourth area 86d, the first area 86a → the second area 86b → the third area 86c → the second area when the winning to the second working port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 86d. By providing the four areas 86a to 86d as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the second operation port 34 are stored on hold. The number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The special figure execution area 87 stores hold information to be subjected to determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate and when the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the holding information stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure holding area 85 is moved to the special drawing execution area 87. Is done. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b, the hold information stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure holding area 86 is moved to the execution area 87 for special figures.

  Information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The general-purpose holding area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c, and a fourth area 88d, and numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 88a to 88d as the hold information on the normal side. In this case, in the first area 88a to the fourth area 88d, the first area 88a → the second area 88b → the third area 88c → the fourth area when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 88d. By providing the four areas 88a to 88d in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the through gate 35 are reserved and stored. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the ordinary map holding area 65c is not limited to four and may be any number, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be. An execution area 89 for a general map is provided in the general map holding area 65c. The execution area 89 for a common map is an area in which holding information on a target to be subjected to the public power open lottery process when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 88a of the general map hold area 65c is moved to the execution area 89 for normal maps.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  The pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Accordingly, the probability that the power transmission open state is won in the power distribution open lottery process using the power transmission random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed in the general map display unit 38a are as follows. It is constant regardless of the gaming state, and is the number of times that the utility wire 34a is in the open state in the open state of the general power, one open period of the general power feature 34a, and in the open state of the general power feature 34a. In the case where the open state occurs a plurality of times, the execution mode of the drive control of the universal utility 34a such as the closing period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is also constant regardless of the game state It is. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the display control mode of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the drive control mode of the general utility 34a according to the type of the support mode, the program capacity for executing these controls In addition, the data capacity can be reduced. Since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in the present embodiment is a probability that the winning / raising lottery mode has a high probability. It is a gaming state that is a mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, as the success / failure results, a jackpot result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also be the transition trigger to the success / failure lottery mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close lottery mode while triggering the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is obtained is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. The round game is continued until one of the conditions in which the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 becomes the upper limit number and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric prize device 32 is satisfied. It is a game. In the present embodiment, the special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the open duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 32 is set to 10. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to be longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the maximum number of winnings for one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of game balls won in the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game. The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are This is an opening / closing number regulation mode that ends when one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. A plurality of types of opening continuation periods in one opening operation of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode are set. These open durations are all set longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds), but the game ball firing cycle and the maximum number of winnings (specifically 10) There are a period less than the product, and a period longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10). In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the number of players can be increased although the number is smaller than the opening / closing execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained.

  As the success / failure table, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (d), the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 85 based on the winning to the first operating port 33. The first special figure success / failure table used in the determination of success / failure and the second special information used in the determination of the success / failure of the second holding information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 based on the winning in the second operating port 34. A special table for success / failure table is set. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different success / failure tables for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / failure lottery mode in the determination of success / failure. Existing.

  Specifically, each of the success / failure tables will be described. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the low probability of success / failure table for the first special figure has two random number values (for example, “5” and “305” as the jackpot result). )), And other values are random numbers resulting in outliers. In other words, when the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the success / failure determination is made for the first hold information, the outcome may not be the jackpot result, although it may be either the jackpot result or the missed result.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the high probability table for the first special figure is set to have a larger number of random number values as the jackpot result than in the low probability table for the first special figure. Specifically, there are 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305” ”,“ 334 ”,“ 365 ”,“ 392 ”,“ 420 ”,“ 470 ”,“ 495 ”,“ 520 ”,“ 558 ”,“ 575 ”,“ 599 ”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. The other random number values are random number values that result in outliers. In other words, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first hold information, the jackpot result or the lost result is not a small hit result.

  In the low likelihood table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9C, the random number value resulting in the jackpot result is the same as in the low probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, a random number value other than the random number resulting in the jackpot result is a random number value resulting in the jackpot result. In other words, when the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the success / failure determination process is performed on the second hold information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. In addition, a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result are set as the small hit results. The first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are different in the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode, as will be described in detail later. In addition, the winning probabilities of these first to third small hit results are 199/600, which are the same.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot result is the same as in the case of the high probability table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, a random number value other than the random number resulting in the jackpot result is a random number value resulting in the jackpot result. That is, when the winning / no-win lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second hold information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. Similar to the low probability table for the second special figure, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set as the small hit results. The winning probabilities of the first to third small hit results are substantially the same at 193/600 or 194/600.

  As described above, when the second hold information is a trigger for the success / failure determination, a structure that can generate a small hit result is generated, and a winning to the second operating port 34 is generated to deal with the small hit result. The open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is generated, the player can slightly increase the ball.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure holding area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the two conditions of the number of round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode and the winning lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Yes.

  As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 10A and 10B, the distribution table includes 2R low-accuracy results, 2R high-accuracy results, 4R low-accuracy results, and 4R as types of jackpot results. High accuracy results, 6R low accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, 10R low accuracy results, 10R high accuracy results, 16R low accuracy results, and 16R high accuracy results are set.

  The 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result have two round games executed in the open / close execution mode, and the 4R low-probability result and 4R high-precision result have four round games executed in the open / close execution mode. The accuracy result and the 6R high-accuracy result have 6 rounds of execution in the opening / closing execution mode, and the 10R low-accuracy result and the 10R high-accuracy result have 10 executions of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode. The 16R high-precision result indicates that the round game is executed 16 times in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result indicate that the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the success / failure lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. In either case, the low probability mode is set. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, the 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result and 16R high-accuracy result indicate that the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the success / failure lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. In either case, the high probability mode is set. This high-probability mode will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the distribution table includes a first characteristic used for determining the distribution of the first hold information acquired based on the winning to the first working port 33. A distribution table for illustration and a distribution table for second special drawing used for determination of distribution of the second hold information acquired based on winning in the second operation port 34 are set.

  The distribution table for each distribution table will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 10A, the distribution table for the first special figure is a 2R low-accuracy result, 2R high-accuracy result as a type of jackpot result to be distributed. Results: 4R low accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result, 16R low accuracy result, and 16R high accuracy result. In the distribution table for the first special figure, “0 to 1” corresponds to the 2R low-accuracy result, “2 to 5” corresponds to the 2R high-accuracy result, and “6 to 7” corresponds to 4R. Corresponds to low-accuracy results, "8-11" corresponds to 4R high-accuracy results, "12-13" corresponds to 6R low-accuracy results, "14-17" 6R high-accuracy "18-19" corresponds to a 10R low-accuracy result, "20-23" corresponds to a 10R high-accuracy result, and "24-25" corresponds to a 16R low-accuracy result. "26-29" corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy result. In this case, the probability of 2R low-accuracy results, 4R low-accuracy results, 6R low-accuracy results, 10R low-accuracy results and 16R low-accuracy results is about 6.7%, respectively. The probability of a 6R high accuracy result, a 10R high accuracy result, and a 16R high accuracy result is about 13%, respectively. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10B, the distribution table for the second special figure is set with a 16R low-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result as types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the distribution table for the second special figure, “0-9” corresponds to the 16R low-accuracy result, and “10-29” corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy result. In this case, the probability of a 16R low-accuracy result is about 33%, and this probability is 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result and This is the same as the probability that any of the 16R low probability results will be selected. The probability of a 16R high-precision result is about 67%, and this probability is 2R high-precision result, 4R high-precision result, 6R high-precision result, 10R high-precision result, and 16R in the distribution table for the first special figure. It is the same as the probability that one of the high-precision results is selected.

  The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of being in the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the big win is won. On the other hand, the average number of executions of the round game is greater in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the winning to the second working port 34 occurs more than the case where the winning to the first working port 33 occurs and the internal lottery is performed. Thus, the player is more advantageous when the internal lottery is performed.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in the column. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol sequences after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the small hit results are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the miss results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines a variation display period in the special symbol display units 37 a and 37 b and a symbol variation display period in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is determined. Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reader connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S113, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power outage monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag in the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S209). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 are read. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of the plural types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at 0.6 seconds which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

  After that, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S213), and the display control of the general figure display section 38a and the drive control of the general electric utility 34a are performed. The ordinary power transmission control process for performing is performed (step S214). The processing contents of these special figure special power control processing and ordinary figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

  In subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display units 37a and 37b in the special figure hold display units 37c and 37d In addition to setting, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map display unit 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to update the contents.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

<Entry detection processing>
Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected in the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, information “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In a detected state, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and 10 prize balls are awarded. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a receives one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S306). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S309). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It determines with having been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S311), “1” is set to the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S312), and further The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special power prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power prize apparatus 32 in the open / close execution mode. In the special chart special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special power prize flag, so that one game ball enters the special power prize device 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric prize device 32 in the round game or open / close execution mode. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and 15 prize balls are received. When the command is output once, the counter value for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S315), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S316). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to “1”, the special drawing reservation area 65a holds the reserved area RE. A process for newly storing the hold information is executed on condition that the number of stored hold information is less than the upper limit number of four. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The single prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special chart special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”, the special chart reservation area 65a holds the reserved area RE. A process for newly storing the hold information is executed on condition that the number of stored hold information is less than the upper limit number of four. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal interrupt / general power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag, so that On the condition that the number of reserved information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four, the process of storing the current numerical value information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 as the reserved information on the general map side in the general map hold area 65c is executed To do. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to “0” when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already described, when one game ball is detected by one ball detection sensor 42a-49a, In the situation where the detection of the one game ball is continued by the detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 specifies that one game ball has been detected by the entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. Done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

<Configuration for paying out game balls>
Next, processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 and the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93. The payout-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout-side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be normally paid out, and if the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball cannot be normally discharged, The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout is not normally possible to the main CPU63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform notification indicating that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally. In this manner, a notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is filled with game balls, a state where no balls are refilled in the tank 75, a state where no balls are replenished, and a payout device 76 There are a payout abnormal state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is fully filled when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball detection sensor is released. Identifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and a detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor 76 does not continuously detect the game ball in spite of the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormality state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is determined to be opened from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the opened state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when receiving a main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when receiving a main body closing command.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank, the process for stopping the game ball payout And a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the payout abnormal state, the process of stopping payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating a payout abnormality state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for allowing the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. If the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball Is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out game balls. The payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one paying ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S409).

<Configuration for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 as described above, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, the signal connection board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92 with regard to the configuration of this electrical connection. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. Thus, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the main CPU 63 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the winning / losing lottery mode is in the high probability mode, and one game round is completed. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), the payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the game ball payout in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
-A payout rate that is a ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10-A game play in a normal game state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the high probability mode Rate (hereinafter referred to as “B”)
・ Rolling out rate in open / close execution mode ・ Routing rate in high probability mode ・ Number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is expressed as “ S ”)
B-S × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
-Number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entrance part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided so that a connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control apparatus 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a to expose the MPU 62. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being performed illegally. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. An interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be accessed at random, and when compared with the same data capacity, the management-side RAM 114 requires a faster time for reading than the management-side ROM 113. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to always measure date information and time information and output the date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information relating to the entry of game balls received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second prize opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, the second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level when the mode is not the high probability mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level when the mode is the high probability mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. The management-side CPU 112 receives no instruction from the main-side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later, when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 in accordance with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 changes to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included in the first correspondence area 123a together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. The second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included along with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also includes information indicating that the game is a special prize winning device 32, and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special prize winning device 32 (15). Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 in the fifth correspondence area 123e (one) ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the mode is the high probability mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

  In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. In the fifteenth corresponding relationship area 123o, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information in the management CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, each time a signal is output, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o output information for recognizing the type of the signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output. The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management CPU 112.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the current write target. Thereafter, the corresponding relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the corresponding relationship memory 116, and the read corresponding relationship information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written.

  Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already described in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42 a to 44 a detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31. The first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a each store information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the entrance part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first buffers 122a to 122g. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether or not the ninth buffer 122i is in the high probability mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is the previous buffer. A signal indicating whether or not the door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area 123j is stored. Stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the high probability mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the situation in the high probability mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the high probability mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the high probability mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is included in the history information storage area 125. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the mode is the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. However, it is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identify that you did. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when game balls are continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for several minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 includes a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of “0” as a write target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is to be written, the pointer is set so that the pointer information “0” becomes the write-target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  Further, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to “0” and pointer information “0” is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from being read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  First, “15” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognizing output counter indicates the remaining necessary number of information outputs for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As already described, since 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized as signal types, “15” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal corresponds to .about.122o is performed. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and the n + 1th buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, and then corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Accordingly, if the recognition output counter is “15” to “13”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of the winning balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “12”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “10”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. The type identification command is read, and if the recognition output counter is “8”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “7”, the type identification command indicating the high probability mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “6”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “5” to “1”, a type identification command indicating blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S503 and S503). Step S504).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S506: YES), an output process of an identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started in the main CPU 63. In the management process, the combination of processes after step S606 is executed 16 times or more before the process starts.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122o that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S605).

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 Run the process again.

  When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S <b> 607, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, although details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122o are stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 23A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 23C shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. FIG. 23 (d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed in the management CPU 112. FIG. 23 (d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed.

  By starting the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. The Further, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 23B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the situation in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 22). Thereafter, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 23B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and stores the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, t10 to t12, t13 to t15, and t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at the timing from t16 to t18.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing t19, as shown in FIG. 23B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and stores the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing t21 as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, “10” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, The total number of opening / closing execution modes, whether or not the high probability mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened / closed. Therefore, first, “10” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, whereby the number of management targets corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven inbound detection sensors 42a. To 48a is specified (step S703).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “9” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “7”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “6”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to "5", the fifth output flag is set to "1" Whether the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, is “6” set in the sixth output flag? If the value of the management target counter is “4” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. Note that, as described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S706).

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2” It is determined whether or not the transition to the probability mode has occurred. If the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the corresponding signal output state was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “3” and the current management target is the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “2”. When the current management target is in the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “1” and the current management target is the front door frame 14. Determines whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level (step S709). Step S710).

  When a negative determination is made at step S704, when a process at step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S707, when a process at step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S709, or step When the processing of S710 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S712). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onward is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S801, “10” is set in the check target counter. To do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S803 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, the above writing is performed. In addition to the correspondence information, start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  When the write process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are displayed. A combination of the corresponding relationship information indicating any of the above and the history information is stored. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information and the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written are stored in the history information storage area 125. The combination of the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current check target counter is “8” to “10”, the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j are information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the high probability mode. Since either the information indicating that it is the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14 and the end information is stored as history information. It becomes a state. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

  When a negative determination is made at step S806, when a negative determination is made at step S807, or when the process at step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26A shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26B shows an HI level signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. FIG. 26 (c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26 (d) shows a HI level signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 26E shows the writing timing of history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 26A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 26A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and switching of the LOW level is not a storage target of history information, the timing of t2 in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26A, the first to seventh buffers 122a at the timing t3, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t9, the timing t10, the timing t13, and the timing t14, respectively. The output state of the signal input to any of -122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the timing t4 when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high probability mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing at time t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high probability mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the timing t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is open. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is in the state where the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading apparatus is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since a power supply operation unit for performing a stop operation and a start operation of supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is operated. Thus, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 and expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for an operator other than the game hall administrator to perform an operation of reading history information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, whereby the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to perform both control information confirmation and history information confirmation. When control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device confirms control information. When a signal is transmitted and confirmation of history information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are different. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and reading for history confirmation is performed to the reading terminal 102. When the apparatus is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading apparatus.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S903 is executed or when the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), the process stands by in step S905. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

  Next, external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special power prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special power prize winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are calculated (step S1007). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of balls calculated in steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1002 is defined as the entrance number K1, and the calculation is performed in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is set as the number K2 of balls entered, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1004 is set as the number K3 entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls K4, and the number calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entering balls of the second working port 34 is defined as the number of entering balls K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K4 × “first operating port” The number of winning balls for winning 33 ”+ K5 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the work area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). “D1”)
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. The total number of balls K3 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: the total number K4 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage then history notes Using the newest RTC information oldest RTC information in the history for the area 124 of the 117, the history information being the object of this operation is to calculate the total time it took to be extracted every (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. In addition, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  After that, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in the case of step S1007, except that the period is the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1011 and step S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 is opened calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entrances K11, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is performed. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize apparatus calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1011. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The thirteenth parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 The total number of balls K13 / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. Fourteenth parameter: the total number K14 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout of game balls (K12 × “general The number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+ K15 ×" the second operating port 34 ". Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” ") Thereafter, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the high probability mode are stored, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the situation of the high probability mode. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1015). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the high probability mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the high probability mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information as serial numbers, the correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and the history information storage area 125 in which start information is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and start information, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and start information indicating the high probability mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating the high probability mode are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high probability mode.

  Then, out period 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, and the like that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the high probability mode identified in step S1015. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period of the high probability mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1015 and step S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1015 is set as the number of entrances K21, and the entrance of the general winning entrance 31 calculated in step S1015 is obtained. The difference in the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K22 of balls, and the special prize device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23. Calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015, with the number K24. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K25 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of entered balls K23 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the first working port 33 K24 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

<Configuration of special electric prize winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special electricity prize winning device 32 will be described. FIG. 29 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing a region where the special prize winning device 32 is provided.

  The special prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA as already described. The position where the special prize winning device 32 is provided is an intermediate position in the vertical direction in the right area PA3. It extends in the horizontal direction from a certain right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the game area PA. Thus, by providing the special electricity prize device 32 extending in the horizontal direction, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 surely passes through the area where the special electricity prize device 32 is provided.

  The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201 in which an upstream region of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed, an opening / closing member 202 that prevents or allows a game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and an opening / closing member. And a guide member 203 for guiding the movement of 202. The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. An upstream region 45 c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage formation body 201 such that the inlet portion 45 b exists in the right wall portion 201 a of the passage formation body 201.

  The inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is open to the right, allowing game balls that flow down the right area PA3 to enter. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is inclined downward to the left in the region continuing from the inlet portion 45b, but the game ball is led to the back side of the game board 24 on the downstream side. The direction of the passage changes so that the direction of the passage changes and the game ball is led out below the game board 24. And the exit part of the upstream area 45c of the 4th discharge passage part 45 exists in the back side of the game board 24, and the downstream area 45d of the 4th discharge path part 45 provided in the back side of the said game board 24 is provided. Connected to the entrance. A downstream region 45 d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 extends in the vertical direction toward the lower side of the game board 24. Due to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is discharged to the lower side of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24. As already described, the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided with a special electric detection sensor 45a for detecting a game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 (that is, a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32). However, the special electric power detection sensor 45 a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

  An opening / closing member 202 is provided to open and close the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45. 30 is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 202, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming body 201 and the opening / closing member 202 showing how the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 202. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening / closing member 202 and the drive unit 32b for special electricity.

  The opening / closing member 202 is formed of a synthetic resin and is horizontally long as shown in FIG. 30, and has a rectangular outer edge base portion 211 having a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and a horizontal portion of the base portion 211. And a blocking portion 212 integrally formed with the base portion 211 so as to stand in the vertical direction on one end side in the direction. The base portion 211 is formed with an opening 213 that penetrates the base portion 211 in the vertical direction. The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the lateral dimension of the opening 213 is set to be more than a multiple of the diameter of the game ball, specifically, more than 5 times the diameter of the game ball and less than 6 times the diameter of the game ball. Has been. Although the position where the opening 213 is formed is a position biased to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the base portion 211, it is an intermediate position in both the front-rear direction and the lateral direction in the base portion 211. Has a plate-like portion around the opening 213.

  A blocking portion 212 is formed so as to rise upward from the peripheral portion on the left side of the opening 213 in the base portion 211. The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face the horizontal direction. More specifically, the blocking portion 212 has an area of the plate surface so as to block the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 from flowing in the game ball as shown in FIG. 31 (a). It is set to a size that can be completely closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening / closing member 202 is supported by the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 in a state in which the opening / closing member 202 is slidable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction from the right end portion of the game area PA to the front of the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 include a slide through hole 221 that penetrates the game board 24 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer edge portion of the opening / closing member 202 in a front view. An opening / closing member 202 is inserted into the slide through hole 221, and the opening / closing member 202 can slide along the slide through hole 221 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the state inserted in the slide through hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 is positioned close to the right plate surface of the right wall portion 201a where the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201. Will be confronted. The distance between the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, but the blocking portion 212 allows the game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45. If the blocking is possible, the distance is arbitrary. Further, the right plate surface of the right wall 201a is in contact with the blocking unit 212, and the blocking unit 212 moves to the right wall 201a when the opening / closing member 202 moves. It is good also as a structure which slides on the board surface of the right side.

  The opening / closing member 202 has a closed position in which the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 as shown in FIG. 31 (a), and a fourth discharge passage portion as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The blocking portion 212 is moved to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the 45 inlet portions 45b, and can be moved to the open position where the inlet portions 45b are opened rightward. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a special electric drive unit 32b for sliding the opening / closing member 202 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the opening / closing member 202. The drive unit 32b for special electricity is a solenoid that is an electric actuator. In a non-driving state in which the drive signal is not output from the main CPU 63 to the special electric drive unit 32b, the output unit 226 of the special electric drive unit 32b is applied by the urging force of the urging member 225 of the special electric drive unit 32b. Is arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, in a driving state in which a drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the special-purpose drive unit 32b, a force that pulls the output unit 226 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the output unit 226. Moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the urging force of the urging member 225 and is disposed at the retracted position. The front end of the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening / closing member 202. Therefore, when the special electric drive unit 32b is in a non-driven state and the output unit 226 is arranged at the protruding position, the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position as shown in FIG. When the drive unit 32b is in a driving state and the output unit 226 is disposed at the retracted position, the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position as shown in FIG. In addition, since the main body part 227 is present on the back side of the game board 24 and the output part 226 is connected to the rear end part of the opening / closing member 202, the special electric drive part 32b is connected to the special electric machine from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The driving portion 32b for use is not visible or difficult to view.

  In addition to FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31 (b), FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. ) And will be described. 33A and 33B are cross-sectional views taken along line AA in FIG. 31 (a) and 33 (a) show a state in which the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, and FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b) illustrate the state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position. It shows the state. First, the case where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position will be described.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 33 (a). . Accordingly, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball is prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

  Regardless of whether or not the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the opening 213 of the base portion 211 exists on the right side of the blocking portion 212 as described above. In addition, in the base 211, the guide plate 214, which is an area on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213, has a front end located on the front door frame 14 when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. It faces the panel 52 at a position close to it. The distance between the front end portion of the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. Thus, in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, even if the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 attempts to flow downward from the front end portion of the guide plate portion 214, It is blocked by the window panel 52.

  In a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the left end portion of the guide plate portion 214 extends in the front-rear direction at a position below the inlet portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the passage formation body 201. It enters into the formed slide through hole 221. In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and is inclined downward toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 is opposed to the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14. Yes. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, even if the game ball tries to move to the left of the guide plate portion 214 from the left end portion of the guide plate portion 214, it is blocked by the passage forming body 201. The Since the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is not only inclined downward toward the left as described above, but also downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, the opening / closing member 202 is in the closed position. In this state, the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 is moved toward the opening 213 by its own weight and flows into the opening 213.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the guide member 203 is provided so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, and the portion protruding forward is disposed at the closed position. It faces the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 that is open. The left region 232 excluding the right end side receiving portion 231 in the forward projecting portion extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. However, the protruding amount of the left region 232 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the facing range. Accordingly, the opening 213 is not blocked by the guide member 203 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. Further, since the front-rear direction dimension of the left region 232 is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball does not ride on the left region 232.

  On the other hand, in the guide member 203, the receiving portion 231 that exists on the right side of the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the left side region 232, and the front end portion of the receiving portion 231 is the front door frame 14. The window panel 52 is opposed to the window panel 52. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 attempts to flow downward from the front end portion of the receiving portion 231, it is blocked by the window panel 52. Since the receiving portion 231 is present at the right end portion of the game board 24, even if a game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 attempts to flow downward from the right end portion of the receiving portion 231, it is the resin base 21. Is blocked by a portion provided on the right side of the game board 24.

  The upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is set such that the dimension in the front-rear direction and the dimension in the lateral direction are both larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33A, the front region 233 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 arranged at the closed position on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231. At the left edge of the front area 233, there is a restricting portion 234 for preventing the game ball placed on the front area 233 from falling from the left edge of the front area 233 to the left of the front area 233. It is integrally formed. The front region 233 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball placed on the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves to the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 by its own weight. The rear region 235 has a downward slope toward the left, and there is no portion that prevents the game ball from flowing down from the left end of the rear region 235 to the left of the rear region 235. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball placed on the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 due to its own weight. It will flow into 213.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position will be described. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b). It is open to the right without any problems. As a result, the game ball can enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the entire opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 is disposed in the slide through hole 221, and the inlet portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 is present on the right side of the opening / closing member 202. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the guide plate portion 214 extends in the horizontal direction between the inlet portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 in the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. Will be extended to. Since the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is inclined downward toward the left end portion of the rear region 235 as described above, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is directed toward the guide plate portion 214 by its own weight. Since the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is inclined downward to the left, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is moved by its own weight, and the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is moved. It will move toward. That is, in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is directed toward the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 by its own weight. It moves and enters the entrance 45b. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, not only can the game ball enter the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, but also the inlet of the fourth discharge passage 45. The game ball entering the portion 45 b is guided by the opening / closing member 202.

  When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 as compared with the case where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. And the window panel 52 become wider. This distance is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, depending on the flow direction or the momentum of the game ball that has flowed down toward the special electric prize device 32 in the right region PA3, the game ball enters the space between the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52, and the space is It may happen that the game ball flows down below the special prize winning device 32 by flowing down. That is, even when the opening / closing member 202 is in the open position, the game ball that has reached the position of the special prize winning device 32 flows down below the special prize winning device 32 without winning the special prize winning device 32. Can happen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball mounted on the guide plate portion 214 is formed by integrally forming a protruding portion that protrudes upward over the entire front end portion of the guide plate portion 214. It is good also as a structure which cannot fall from the front side edge part of the part 214, or cannot fall easily.

  Next, referring to FIG. 29 again, a configuration for setting the flow-down mode of the game ball in the right area PA3 to a predetermined mode will be described.

  In the right area PA3, on the upstream side of the special prize winning device 32, a game ball flowing down the upstream side of the right area PA3 is placed on the right end side of the special prize winning device 32, more specifically, the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and its receiving portion 231. Guiding means for guiding to the periphery is provided. A guide nail group 241 including a plurality of nails 24b is provided as the guide means. In the guide nail group 241, a plurality of nails 24 b are arranged in a lower right direction so as to generate a guide portion that is inclined downward from the right frame portion 36 g of the center frame 36 a toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. It is formed with. In this case, the distance between the nail 24b existing at the left end of the guide nail group 241 and the right frame portion 36g is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also set. It is set to be less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guide nail group 241 is guided toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide portion of the guide nail group 241.

  The game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening portion 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 as described above when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. And flows into the opening 213. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the right area PA3 and reached the special prize device 32 in the situation where the opening / closing member 202 is located at the closed position flows into the area near the receiving part 231 at the opening 213 of the base part 211. Thus, it flows down toward the lower part of the special electric prize winning device 32.

  Here, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided in the right region PA3, but the through gate 35 is disposed near the passage formation body 201 of the special prize winning device 32 on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32. . Further, only a game ball that has flowed down from the position near the passage formation body 201 of the special electricity prize device 32 to the lower side of the special electricity prize device 32 can enter the through gate 35 between the special electricity prize device 32 and the through gate 35. A regulation nail group 242 is provided for the purpose. This prevents the game ball that has reached the special prize winning device 32 from passing through the through gate 35 in a state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the game ball that has reached the special prize winning device 32 moves on the guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 on the inlet portion of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 as already described. It will flow down toward 45b. In this case, when the arrangement of the opening / closing member 202 in the open position is maintained until the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 reaches the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, the game ball is The ball enters the entrance 45b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance portion 45b, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 at that time is changed to the guide plate portion 214. Following the movement of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and moving to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, being guided to the opening 213 of the base part 211 along the inclination of the upper surface of the guide plate part 214, and flowing into the opening 213; Become. Accordingly, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is present in the predetermined range X near the passage formation body 201 on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball is stored in the passage formation body. At a position close to 201, it will flow down below the special electricity prize device 32 and will pass through the through gate 35. Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the hold information on the normal side is acquired, and an opportunity to open the common utility 34a of the second working port 34 occurs. That is, the opportunity to enter the through gate 35, that is, the opportunity to open the universal utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 occurs only in the opening / closing execution mode.

  With reference to the time chart of FIG. 34, a description will be given of how a winning to the second working port 34 occurs in the opening / closing execution mode. 34 (a) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 34 (b) shows the open / closed state of the special electric prize device 32, FIG. 34 (c) shows the timing when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs, FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the open state of the second working port 34, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the timing at which a winning to the second working port 34 occurs. In addition, when it becomes a normal power open state, the open state of the second operation port 34 occurs a plurality of times, but in FIG. 34, the open state of the second operation port 34 occurs only once for convenience of explanation. Will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1. In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a round game is executed in each period of timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, timing t13 to timing t15, etc. The device 32 is opened.

  Among these round games, in each of the round game from the timing t2 to the timing t3 and the round game from the timing t7 to the timing t9, the timing T3 and the timing t9 when the special prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. In each of these, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32. When the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at the timing of t3 and the timing of t9, and the special prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state, it is placed on the guide plate portion 214. The game ball thus dropped falls into the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202. The dropped game ball wins the through gate 35 at each of the timings t4 and t10 as shown in FIG. 34 (c). As a result, the hold information on the normal map side is acquired, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the general map display unit 38a. Then, when the variation display of the pattern is ended, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the general power of the second operating port 34 is extended from the timing t5 to the timing t8 and from the timing t11 to the timing t14. The accessory 34a is opened. As described above, even a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided, so that the special electric prize device 32 tries to win the game ball toward the right area PA3. By continuing the release of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the winning to the second operation port 34 occurs at the timing of t6 and the timing of t12. Thereby, the 2nd hold information is acquired. Since the start of a new game round is blocked during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the execution of the success / failure determination process for the acquired second hold information and the start of the game round triggered by the second hold information are: This is performed after the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, in the round game from the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 at the timing t15 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Even if a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball does not fall to a position where it can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, no winning to the through gate 35 occurs for the end of the round game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34A, the opening / closing execution mode occurs at the timing of t16. At the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the hold information on the map side is held in the map holding area 65c. Thereby, the opening of the second working port 34 is started as shown in FIG. 34 (d) at the timing of t17, which is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and this opening period continues until the timing of t19. Then, during this period, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 or the right area PA3, so that the winning at the second operating port 34 is made at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. Occur. In this case, if the second reserved information for the upper limit number is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 at this time, the second reserved information is newly acquired. Then, the second hold information becomes an execution target of the success / failure determination process and triggers the start of a new game round.

<Execution mode of opening / closing execution mode>
Next, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode will be described. FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode.

  As already explained, in this embodiment, as a big hit result, 2R low accuracy result, 2R high accuracy result, 4R low accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result. As a result, there are 16R low-precision results and 16R high-precision results. In any of the opening / closing execution modes that occur when the jackpot result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the interval period between round games is set to 3 seconds. In any of these opening / closing execution modes, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the opening continuation period of each round game is set to 29 seconds. In each round game, the special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once.

  On the other hand, the number of round games generated in these opening / closing execution modes is different. Specifically, the number of round games is set to 2 for 2R low-accuracy results and 2R high-accuracy results, and the number of round games is set to 4 for 4R low-accuracy results and 4R high-accuracy results. The number of round games is set to 6 for the 6R low-accuracy result and the 6R high-accuracy result, and the number of round games is set to 10 for the 10R low-accuracy result and 10R high-accuracy result. In the result and the 16R high-precision result, the number of round games is set to 16 times. As the number of round games executed increases, the number of balls entered into the special prize winning device 32 in one opening / closing execution mode increases, so that the jackpot result with the larger number of round games executed is more advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the number of executions of the round game increases, the number of times that the opening / closing member 202 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position increases. As described above, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 can win the through gate 35 at the timing when the opening / closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position. Therefore, the more often the opening / closing member 202 slides between the open position and the closed position, the higher the frequency of winning through the through gate 35 and the second winning through the winning through the through gate 35. There will be an opportunity for the general utility 34a of the operating port 34 to be in an open state. And, when the second hold information acquired by the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes the execution target of the success / failure determination process, either the big win result or the small win result occurs, An opening / closing execution mode will occur. Also from this point, the jackpot result with a large number of round games executed is more advantageous for the player.

  As a jackpot result in which the number of executions of the round game is the same, each of a low-accuracy result and a high-accuracy result is set. That is, a 2R low-accuracy result and a 2R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed twice. Further, a 4R low-accuracy result and a 4R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed four times. Further, a 6R low-accuracy result and a 6R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed 6 times. In addition, a 10R low-accuracy result and a 10R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed 10 times. In addition, a 16R low-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed 16 times. As a result, as a big hit result with the same number of round games occurring in the open / close execution mode, the low-accuracy result that the win / fail lottery mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode and the high / low lottery mode after the open / close execution mode are high. There is a high probability result that becomes a probability mode. Therefore, for the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, there will be a jackpot result in which the player's profit level is the same while the setting mode of the winning / losing lottery mode is different, and the player expects the type of the jackpot result More types of subjects.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, there are a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result as the small hit results. In any of the opening / closing execution modes that occur when these small hit results are obtained, the upper limit number of winnings is set to 10 as shown in FIG. 35 (b). On the other hand, the number of times the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode and the opening duration of the special electricity prize winning device 32 at each opening time are different for each small hit result.

  FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the small hit result is obtained. 36 (a1), FIG. 36 (a2), and FIG. 36 (a3) show the execution period of the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 36 (b1), FIG. 36 (b2), and FIG. Indicates the period during which it is open. Moreover, FIG. 36 (a1) and FIG. 36 (b1) show the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the first small hit result is reached, and FIG. 36 (a2) and FIG. FIG. 36 (a3) and FIG. 36 (b3) are executed in response to the third small hit result. FIG. 36 (a3) and FIG. 36 (b3) are executed in response to the second small hit result. The execution mode of the open / close execution mode is shown.

  In the case of the first small hit result, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b1) The special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened only once at the timing of t3. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in this one opening time is set to 10 seconds. The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, the release duration period is the game ball firing cycle and the winning upper limit. The period is longer than the product of the number.

  In the case of the second small hit result, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b2) The special prize winning device 32 is released once for each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to the timing of t19. . That is, in the case of the second small hit result, the number of times the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened is five. The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 at each opening time is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, the release duration of each opening round is the game ball firing cycle. And a period shorter than the product of the maximum number of winnings. However, the total opening duration of each opening round is a period longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the maximum number of winnings. Further, the total opening duration of each opening round is equal to the opening duration of one opening round in the opening / closing execution mode in the first small hit result.

  In the case of the third small hit result, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t40 as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b3) t21 timing, t22 timing to t23 timing, t24 timing to t25 timing, t26 timing to t27 timing, t28 timing to t29 timing, t30 timing to t31 timing, t32 timing to t33 The special prize winning device 32 is opened once over the timing, the timing of t34 to the timing of t35, the timing of t36 to the timing of t37, and the timing of t38 to the timing of t39. In other words, in the case of the third small hit result, the number of times the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened is 10 times. The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 at each opening time is set to 1 second as shown in FIG. The game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, the release duration of each opening round is the game ball firing cycle. And a period shorter than the product of the maximum number of winnings. However, the total opening duration of each opening round is a period longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the maximum number of winnings. Further, the total opening duration of each opening round is equal to the opening duration of one opening round in the opening / closing execution mode in the first small hit result, and the total opening duration of each opening round in the second small hit result Equal to duration.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of each small hit result, the smaller the number of times of opening, the longer the opening duration of each opening time is set. The longer the one open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 is, the easier it is to win the special electric prize winning device 32. On the other hand, the greater the number of times the special prize winning device 32 is opened, the more chances that the special prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state when the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202. Therefore, winning through the through gate 35 is likely to occur. Accordingly, in the first small hitting result, the winning in the special electric prize winning device 32 is most likely to occur, but the winning in the through gate 35 is the least likely to be generated, and in the third small hitting result, the winning in the special electric prize winning device 32 is most generated. Although difficult, winning to the through gate 35 is most likely to occur, and according to the second small hit result, both winning to the special prize winning device 32 and winning to the through gate 35 are likely to occur moderately. As a result, a player who expects to win a prize at the special electric prize winning device 32 expects a first jackpot result, and a player who expects to win a prize to the through gate 35 expects a third jackpot result. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target expected by the player. In addition, any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result occurs, and there is a merit in each case, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to each small hit result Become.

  The special prize winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in both cases of the second small hit result and the third small hit result, but the interval period of each open round is the same in 3 seconds. Yes. In addition, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guide plate portion 214 when one second elapses during the period in which the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second working port 34 between the open state and the closed state and a processing configuration for switching the special electricity prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. First, a processing configuration for switching the second working port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal power control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ordinary power transmission control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

  First, the hold information acquisition process on the normal side is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if the winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, and there is no situation where the upper limit number of holding information on the drawing side is acquired in the drawing holding area 65c, the power transmission random number counter C4 The numerical information is stored in the ordinary map holding area 65c. In this case, the hold information on the normal side is stored in the order of the first area 88a → second area 88b → third area 88c → fourth area 88d.

  After that, the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1102), and the general-purpose power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S1103). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter is acquired from the general-purpose power address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (step S1105).

  The general-purpose power transmission counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes in steps S1106 to S1110 in the general-purpose power control process is to be executed. In the address table, a start address in a program for executing each processing of Step S1106 to Step S1110 is set in correspondence with numerical information of the ordinary power counter. If the value of the general-purpose power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the normal-number fluctuation start process in step S1106. Jump to the middle processing, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “2”, the processing jumps to the processing for determining the general-purpose figure in step S1108. If the value of the general-purpose power counter is “3” The process jumps to the process of opening the ordinary power in step S1109, and if the value of the ordinary power counter is “4”, the process jumps to the process of closing the ordinary power in step S1110.

  In the map change start process of step S1106, the map information hold information stored in the map hold area 65c is stored on the condition that the map information hold information is stored in the map hold area 65c. The process of shifting is executed. Specifically, the hold information on the map side stored in the first area 88a of the map holding area 65c is shifted to the execution area 89 for the map, and then the second area 88b → the first area 88a, The hold information on the normal side is shifted so that the third area 88c → the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d → the third area 88c. Then, the electric train open lottery process is executed using the holding information on the normal map side newly shifted to the execution area 89 for normal maps as the lottery value. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning in the open state in the open train lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it will be elected in the open state with a probability of 9/10.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning in the open state of the normal train may be higher or lower. In addition, instead of executing the public power open lottery process, a configuration in which the general power open state is surely generated once with respect to the holding information on one general map side may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the open-circuit state.

  In the general map change start process, when the public train opening lottery process is executed, a process of starting the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is executed. In this case, information on the variable display period in which the pattern display unit 38 a displays the pattern in a variable manner is set in a general map general-purpose timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the ordinary power / general timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a is constant regardless of the gaming state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is started, the value of the general map counter is updated from “0” to “1”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general map / electric power control process becomes the normal map changing process.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a may be longer or shorter. In addition, a plurality of variable display periods for the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. Further, in the configuration in which the general electric open state is surely generated once for the hold information on one general map side, instead of executing the general electric release lottery process, In the situation where fluctuation display is not performed and the hold information on the general map side is newly acquired in the situation that is not in the open state of the general power station, or in the situation where the hold information on the general map side is stored on hold When the operation is terminated, a new public power open state may be started using the hold information on the normal map side as an execution opportunity. On the other hand, even if it is a configuration in which the open state of the power transmission is surely generated once with respect to the hold information on the side of one normal map, the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is executed, It is good also as a structure by which a normal power open state is started after execution of the change display of the pattern.

  In the process of changing the normal map in step S1107, a process for updating the display of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a is executed. In addition, when the value set in the general-purpose power timer counter of the main RAM 65 in the normal-data change start process is “0”, the information on the fixed-term information on the normal-data side is displayed in the main RAM 65. In order to display the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the opening of the electric train that has been set to the general-purpose timer counter and the trigger for the execution of the current variation display time of the design in the general-purpose display unit 38a. Execute the process. Then, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “1” to “2”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the general map / electric power control process becomes the general chart determination process.

  In the process of determining the general map in step S1108, when the value of the general map normal power timer counter is “0”, the result of the general power open lottery process that triggered the execution of the current variable pattern display time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the electric train is open. If it is not electrified in the open state, the value of the ordinary power counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process.

  If it is elected to the open state of the public power, a process for setting the open state of the public power is executed. More specifically, “3” is set in the general power release number counter provided in the main RAM 65. The general electric power release number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times that the general electric utility 34a is opened in the normal electric power open state. In addition, numerical information of an opening continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case where the general electric utility 34a is opened once is set in the general electric power timer counter. In addition, “10” is set in the public power prize winning counter. Moreover, the output of the drive signal to the drive part 34b for ordinary electricity is started so that the ordinary utility 34a is opened. The general power prize counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining game balls that can be awarded to the second operating port 34 in the open state of the public power, and every time the winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. In addition, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ordinary power prize winning counter. When the value of the general power prize counter becomes “0”, the current general power release state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of times the general electric utility 34a is opened and the remaining open duration. . Thereafter, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power open process. Here, in this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Accordingly, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state in the normal power open state, the opening duration when the power utility 34a is in the open state once, and the second operation port 34 in the power open state. The upper limit number of winning game balls is constant regardless of the gaming state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect and whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  In the process of releasing the normal train in step S1109, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, the value corresponding to the number of prizes is subtracted from the value of the universal prize winner counter in the main RAM 65. When the value of the general power prize counter is “0”, the value of the general power open count counter is cleared to “0” and the value of the general power timer counter is cleared to “0”. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b, the general electric utility 34a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the general electric power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process. Even if the value of the general power prize counter is not “0”, if the value of the general power timer counter is “0”, the drive signal is output to the general power drive unit 34b. Is stopped, the utility power 34a is closed, and the value of the utility power release counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. If the value of the counter for the number of times of opening the electric power is not “0”, the numerical information on the closing duration of the electric utility 34a is set in the normal electric power timer counter and then the value of the normal electric power counter is set to “ Update from “3” to “4”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power closed process. When the value of the general power open count counter is “0”, the value of the general power counter is cleared to “0” without setting the value in the general power timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary map / electric power control process becomes the ordinary map variation start process.

  In the process of closing the normal power in step S1110, the output of the drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started on the condition that the value of the general-purpose normal power timer counter is “0”. Numerical information of an open duration (specifically, 2 seconds) when the electric utility item 34a is opened and the general electric feature 34a is opened once is set in the general-purpose normal electric timer counter. Then, the value of the ordinary power counter is updated from “4” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the ordinary power transmission control process becomes the normal power open process.

  As described above, when the ordinary power / electric power control process is executed, when the winning to the through gate 35 is generated, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the universal display portion 38a. Then, in the public power open lottery process, when the public power open state is won, the general electric utility 34a of the second working port 34 is in the open general power state where the open state is established. When the second operation port 34 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second operation port 34, and the second hold information is obtained by the game ball winning in the second operation port 34. Is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special electricity prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special figure special electric control process is executed in step S213 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

  First, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step S1201). In the hold information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, the first operating port 33 has been won (step S1301: YES), and the first special figure hold area 85 is stored. If the number of pieces of 1 hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1302: YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. The determination as to whether or not a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 is made by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, “1” is set in the first operation winning flag in step S315 of the pitch detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main side RAM 65 is provided for the main CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 85. The value of the first special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S1303). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure hold display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37 c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reserved storage obtained by adding 1 in step S1303. Store in the area (step S1304). Thereafter, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1305). When receiving the first hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for informing the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 sends a command corresponding to the first hold command. By receiving, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of the first hold information. Note that when the game time is started with the first hold information as an opportunity, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the first hold information by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, a winning to the second working port 34 has occurred (step S1306: YES) ) Further, on the condition that the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 86 is less than the upper limit storing number (step S1307: YES), a process for acquiring the second holding information is performed. Run. Note that whether or not a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 is determined by determining whether or not “1” is set in the second operating prize flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, “1” is set in the second operation winning flag in step S319 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  In the process for obtaining the second hold information, first, the main side RAM 65 is provided for the main CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86. The value of the second special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S1308). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d corresponds to the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86. Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86, that is, the storage corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S1308. Store in the area (step S1309). Thereafter, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1310). When receiving the second hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for informing the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 issues a command corresponding to the second hold command. By receiving, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of the second hold information. Note that when the game time is started with the second hold information as an opportunity, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of the second hold information.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process (step S1201), the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1202), and the special figure special electric address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read. Read (step S1203). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (step S1205).

  The special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps S1206 to S1212 in the special figure special electricity control process should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing each processing of step S1206 to step S1212 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter. When the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S1206, and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”, the special figure fluctuation processing of step S1207 is executed. If the value of the special figure special counter is “2”, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process in step S1208. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is “3”, the special figure in step S1209 is executed. The process jumps to the start process, and when the value of the special figure special power counter is “4”, the process jumps to the special electric power release opening process of step S1210, and when the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “5”, The process jumps to the special electric power closing process, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is “6”, the process jumps to the special electric power end process of step S1212. Hereinafter, each process of step S1206-step S1212 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the special figure variation start process is not executed in a situation where the game times are already executed and in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the special figure change start process, when the second special information holding area 86 does not store the second holding information and the first special figure holding area 85 stores the first holding information (step S1401: YES, step S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 is moved to the execution area 87 for special figures. Thereafter, processing for shifting data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 85a, and the second area 85b → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 85a, the third area 85c → the second area 85b, and the fourth area 85d → the third area 85c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special figure hold counter in the main RAM 65. Thereby, the display content of the 1st special figure reservation display part 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed into the content which the 1st reservation information decreased by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 85 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the first decrease command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, as already described, the image display for informing the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 uses the first decrease command. Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of the first hold information.

  On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is the first hold information. Even if stored in the 1 special figure reservation area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the execution area 87 for special figures. Thereafter, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 86a, and the second area 86b → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 86a, the third area 86c → the second area 86b, and the fourth area 86d → the third area 86c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure holding counter in the main side RAM 65. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. In the data setting process, a second decrease time command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure reservation area 86 has been decreased by one is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the second decrease command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, as already described, the image display for informing the number of the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 uses the second decrease command. Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of second hold information.

  Here, when the second hold information is stored as described above, even if the first hold information acquired prior to the second hold information is stored, the second hold information is for special use. To the execution area 87. Thereby, the 2nd reservation information will be digested preferentially as a starting object of game times rather than the 1st reservation information.

  When the process of step S1403 or step S1404 is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S1405). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game turn start target is the first hold information, the low-probability determination table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9A) is used as the main ROM 64. From the main ROM 64, if the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the game turn start target is the first holding information, the high probability table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9B) is read. If the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game target is the second holding information, the low probability table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9C) is read from the main ROM 64, If the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the game turn start target is the second hold information, the high probability determination table (see FIG. 9D) for the second special figure is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the success / failure table, the information for success / failure determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information stored in the execution area 87 for special maps, and the read numerical information is the above-described success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. In addition, when the start target of the current game round is the second hold information, and when it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the first jackpot result, the second jackpot in the success / failure table It is determined whether any of the numerical information set for each of the result and the third small hit result matches the information for the above-mentioned determination.

  If the result of the determination process is a jackpot result (step S1406: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S1407). In the allocation determination process, if the game turn start target is the first hold information, the first special chart assignment table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 64, and the game start start target is the first. In the case of the 2-hold information, the distribution table for the second special drawing (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the allocation table, the allocation determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the special chart execution area 87, and the allocation table is referred to. Thus, the type of jackpot result corresponding to the read numerical information is specified.

  After executing the allocation determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the allocation determination process (step S1408). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the targets of the start of the current game round, is a stop for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the picture to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S1409, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S1408 is stored in the main RAM 65. In addition, the pattern stop mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some jackpot results. Although the method for selecting the stop result for the jackpot result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is not a big hit result but any one of the small hit results (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in the above determination process. Is set to "1" (step S1411). Thereafter, the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b that is the start of the current game round. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the small hit results, the types of the stop modes of the pictures that are stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b are set differently for each type of the small hit results. In step S1412, The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in step S1411 is stored in the main RAM 65. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some small hit results. . A method for selecting a stop result for a small hit result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary. For example, a stop result may be selected according to the value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the information on the pattern mode selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1410: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, in the current game round, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in advance in the main ROM 64 in advance. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the pattern mode information selected in the case of the jackpot result. It is a common type in the special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b.

  When the process of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 is executed, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S1414). In the specific process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach effect is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if any jackpot result occurs in the current game round, it is determined that a reach effect will occur. Further, if any small hit result occurs in the current game round, it is determined that the reach effect does not occur. Further, when neither the big hit result nor the small win result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information stored in the execution area 87 for special drawing is used to generate the reach. It is determined that the reach effect is generated when the numerical information is corresponding, and it is determined that the reach effect is not generated when the numerical information is not corresponding to the occurrence of reach.

  When it is determined that the reach effect occurs, the information on the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation table stored in the main ROM 64, and Information on the acquired variable display period is set in the special figure special timer counter. If it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the reach non-occurrence table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to and the information of the change display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current change type counter CS is obtained. get. In this case, each variable display period is set so that the variable display period when the reach effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when the reach effect does not occur. Then, the acquired information on the variable display period is set in the special figure special timer counter. The value set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12) is executed.

  The variable display period when no reach occurs is set so that the average period becomes shorter as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 or the second special figure holding area 86 increases. Further, in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the holding information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 or the second special figure reservation area 86 is more than in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. The variable display period when no reach occurs is set so that a shorter variable display period can be selected more easily when the numbers are the same.

  The variable display period selected for the small hit result may be shorter than the variable display period selected for the big hit result. It is good also as a structure shorter than the average value of the fluctuation | variation display period selected when an average value is a jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to increase the speed of the game times when the second hold information is a game time start target and a small hit result is generated.

  Here, in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, the maximum variable display period that is selected when the second hold information is the target of the game round in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, The first hold information is set to a period equal to or shorter than the maximum variable display period that is selected when the first game information is a game turn start target. The average period of the variable display period selected when the second hold information is a target for starting the game round in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the result is not the jackpot result is the success / failure lottery mode. Is set to a period that is equal to or less than the average period of the variable display periods that are selected when the first hold information is a game turn start target and does not result in a jackpot result. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 2nd hold information becomes the start object of game times in the situation which is a low probability mode, it becomes possible to prevent the digestion rate of game times from deteriorating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display that is selected when the second hold information is a start target of the game round and does not result in a big win result in the situation where the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode. The average period of the period is the average period of the variable display period selected when the first hold information is the start target of the game round in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained. It is good also as a structure set so that it may become the same or substantially the same. In this case, the term “substantially the same” means that the average period is different but the player cannot recognize the difference.

  The average period of the variable display period that is selected when the second hold information is a start target of the game round in the situation where the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode and does not result in the jackpot result, Is set to a period shorter than the average period of the variable display periods selected when the first hold information is a game turn start target and does not result in a jackpot result. Accordingly, the digestion rate of the game times when the second hold information is a start target of the game times in the situation of the high probability mode, and the first hold information is the start targets of the game times in the situation of the high probability mode. It is possible to increase the game rate digestion rate.

  After executing the process for specifying the variable display period, the variable command and the type command corresponding to the game times that are the current start target are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1415). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S1414, and the game time that is the start target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether it is compatible is included. Further, the change command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. The type command includes information on whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any kind of jackpot result This information is included. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the small hit result, and if it corresponds to the small hit result, Information indicating whether the result is a small hit result is included.

  Thereafter, on the display unit that is the target of the start of the current game round among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S1416). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “0” when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter corresponds to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S1207) by adding 1. “1”.

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command, the sound emission control device 81 executes a process for determining the execution contents of the game turn effect corresponding to the commands. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. Thereby, the light emission effect in the display light emission part 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker part 54 are performed over the variable display period of this game time. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the execution content of the game turn effect determined this time to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to a table corresponding to the command. Thereby, the display effect in the symbol display apparatus 41 is performed over the variation display period of this game time.

  In this case, when the current game round has a 16R high-accuracy result, the combination of “7” symbols is stopped and displayed on any active line. Also, if the current game round is one of 2R high accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result and 10R high accuracy result, the same odd number other than “7” symbols on any active line The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, if the current game round is one of the 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result, the same even symbol on any active line The combination of is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the current game round is one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, it is not a combination of the same symbols on any active line and a combination of reach symbols However, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “3 · 4 · 1”) is stopped and displayed. As described above, a predetermined symbol combination that is common in the effect for game play in the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed regardless of any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result corresponds to clearly indicating the occurrence of the small hit result Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the opening / closing execution mode that occurs when a small hit result is obtained. Moreover, in the configuration in which the predetermined symbol combination common to any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 41 as described above, In the 2 special figure display section 37b, the pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can identify which kind of small hit result has occurred by merely visually checking the second special figure display portion 37b. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may display a stop result corresponding to the type of the small hit result.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S1207 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38) will be described.

  When the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is 1 or more and the variation display period of the current game times has not elapsed, the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game times are displayed. If it is the content update timing, data setting for updating the display content of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display parts 37a and 37b to be controlled is updated to the display content in the next order.

  In the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the determination result and the determination result, and the symbol display device The game is performed in a certain manner regardless of the contents of the effects for game times at 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed. When the variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After that, the information on the stop state of the picture of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read. As a result, the variable display of the picture is stopped in a state where the picture corresponding to the game result of the current game time is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereafter, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation process is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the special figure finalizing process (step S1208) by adding 1. “2”.

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives a final stop command, it transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display control device 82. When receiving the command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game round over the final stop period.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step S1208 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result ( Step S1502: YES), 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (Step S1503). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by “3” corresponding to the special electric power start process (step S1209). " On the other hand, when the game result of the current game round is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1504). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1206).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step S1209 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is before the start of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) Is set in the special figure special timer counter, and if the game result of this time is a small hit result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is stored in the special figure special electric timer counter. Set (step S1602). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1603). Thereby, the effect corresponding to an opening period is performed in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 53, and the speaker part 54. FIG.

  If it is after the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is started (step S1601: NO), the special figure special electricity timer counter value is “0”, that is, the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: YES), an opening / closing number setting process is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the current game result is a 2R low-accuracy result or a 2R high-accuracy result, “2” is set in the open / close counter provided in the main RAM 65, and the current game result is a 4R low-probability result or 4R high If it is an accurate result, “4” is set to the open / close counter of the main RAM 65, and “6” is set to the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 if the current game result is a 6R low or 6R high result. If the current game result is a 10R low-accuracy result or a 10R high-accuracy result, “10” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65, and the current game result is a 16R low-probability result or a 16R high-precision result. For example, “16” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. Further, if the current game result is the first small hit result, “1” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the second small hit result, the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is set. Is set to "5", and if the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. The open / close counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times to open and close the special prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, the setting process of the opening continuation period is executed (step S1606). In the setting process, if the current game result is any jackpot result, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Also, in the setting process, when the current game result is the first small hit result, the opening duration information for the first small hit result (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. If the current game result is the second small hit result, the opening duration information for the second small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special figure special timer counter, and this game When the result is the third small hit result, information on the open duration for the third small hit result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special timer counter.

  Thereafter, a process for setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S1607). In the setting process, “10” is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 regardless of which jackpot result is the current game result and any jackpot result. The winning counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers.

  Thereafter, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S1608). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in an open state. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1609). When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”. Therefore, by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S1210). It becomes.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electricity release process executed in step S1210 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, that is, when the open duration has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the open / close count counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1702). Thereafter, information on the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (step S1703). Also, a special electricity closing setting process is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in a closed state. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1705). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “4” when the special electric special release process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by “5” corresponding to the special electric charge closing process (step S1211). "

  When the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is not “0”, that is, when the opening continuation period has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not a special electric prize winning device 32 has been won (see FIG. Step S1706). Note that whether or not a prize is awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 32 is determined by judging whether or not “1” is set in the special electricity prize flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, “1” is set to the special electric prize flag in step S311 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the special power prize winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  If a prize is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1707). If the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S1708: YES), and if the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result (step S1709: NO), the processing of steps S1702 to S1705 already described is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is “0” (step S1708: YES), and the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the small hit results (step S1709). : YES) After clearing the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 to “0” (step S1710), the processes of steps S1704 to S1705 already described are executed.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process executed in step S1211 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the small hit results and the special electric prize winning device 32 has been won (step S1801: YES), the main RAM 65 wins. The counter value is decremented by 1 (step S1802). The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 is a case where a game ball that has entered the special electricity prize winning device 32 is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a immediately before the special electricity prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state. . When the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1803: YES), the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S1804).

  In the special electricity closing process, if the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S1805: NO), by determining whether the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, It is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has passed (step S1806: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S1807: YES). A setting process is executed (step S1808). In the setting process, “10” is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, an opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S1809). In the setting process, when the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result, information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is displayed as a special figure special electric timer counter. Set to. Also, in the setting process, if the current game result is the second small hit result, the opening duration information (specifically 2 seconds) for the second small hit result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. If the current game result is the third small hit result, information on the opening duration for the third small hit result (specifically 1 second) is set in the special figure special timer counter.

  Thereafter, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S1810). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in an open state. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is reduced to “4” corresponding to the special electric charge opening process (step S1210) by subtracting one. "

  On the other hand, when the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is “0” (step S1805: YES), an ending period setting process is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result triggered by the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. If the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit result, information (specifically, 2 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small hit result is stored in the special figure special timer counter. set. Thereafter, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1813). Thereby, the effect corresponding to an ending period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emission part 53, and the speaker part 54. FIG. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1814). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “5” when the special electric power closing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “6” corresponding to the special electric power end process (step S1212) by adding one. It becomes.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power end process executed in step S1212 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the high-precision results. If it is (step S1902 and step S1903: YES), “1” is set to the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1904). The high probability flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the high probability mode and the low probability mode is the success / failure lottery mode, and is high when the value of the high probability flag is “1”. In the probability mode, when the value of the high probability flag is “0”, the mode is the low probability mode. Therefore, by performing the process of step S1904, the winning / not-lotting mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. Further, when the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any low probability result (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0”. (Step S1905). As a result, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, when the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the small hit results (step S1902: NO), neither of the processes of step S1904 and step S1905 is executed. As a result, even if the game result becomes any one of the small hit results and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the winning / losing lottery mode does not change before and after the opening / closing execution mode.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1902, when the process of step S1904 is executed, or when the process of step S1905 is executed, a clear process is executed (step S1906). In the clear process, “0” is cleared for various flags and various counters used in the current game round and the current opening / closing execution mode. However, the high probability flag of the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing “0”. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1907). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1206).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since a game ball is paid out when a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can either The game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target entering unit). When this occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part in the pachinko machine 10, and use this managed information. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to each history target entrance section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the entrances that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are the targets for executing the history information storage process and the targets for management using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target entrance part with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball has entered the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only the history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target entrance part, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, whether it is in the high probability mode History information indicating whether or not, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game balls have entered the history target ball entering unit by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the reading device, and it is possible to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the specifying result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, in the configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even when the reading terminal 102 is also used.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, signal paths for the reading terminal 102 can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

  The main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game balls enter the respective history target entrance portions while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is being performed, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. Then, using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations, the data is transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the dedicated signal path | route for transmitting corresponding relationship information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the transmission target information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 each time detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. Thereby, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball into each history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (first to eighth, 11 to 18, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of computation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to each of the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high probability mode are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes an object to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when various parameters are read to analyze the game ball entering mode in the game area PA, it is possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters.

  The management-side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency which calculates various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the process at the start of supplying the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in the situation where the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal processing for proceeding the game is started by the main CPU 63, The calculation of parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target ball entry part, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is generated through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, by using information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of entering the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  The through gate 35 is provided at a position where the entry of a game ball is restricted in a game state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the game ball can be entered in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, by shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible not only to enter the game ball into the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 but also to enter the game ball into the through gate 35. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  When the game ball enters the through gate 35, the hold information on the normal map side is acquired, and when the hold information on the general map side is acquired, the second operation port 34 is open with a high probability. It becomes. When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, either the big hit result or the small hit result is generated to generate the opening / closing execution mode. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, it is possible to enter the game ball into the through gate 35, and when the gaming ball enters the through gate 35, the opening / closing execution mode can occur again. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the open / close execution mode is continuously generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The opening / closing execution mode can occur based on the game ball entering the first operating port 33 where the game ball can enter regardless of the game ball entering the through gate 35. As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the opening / closing execution mode can occur again. In this case, in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the player expects that the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33. In the opening / closing execution mode, the through gate 35 is expected. It is expected that the opening / closing execution mode will be continuously generated based on the game balls entering the ball.

  The probability that the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the game ball enters the first working port 33. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that a game ball enters the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The expected value at which the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the normal side is acquired does not vary depending on the game state. This The processing configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, It becomes easy to manage the expected value. However, As described above, in the configuration in which the expected value does not vary according to the gaming state, it is difficult to give inflection to the game. On the contrary, As described above, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. It will be possible to give an inflection to the opportunity to get hold information on the customs side, As a result, it is possible to give an inflection to the game.

  When a game ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball can enter the second operation port 34, and when the game ball enters the second operation port 34, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered. Occur. Thus, in order to continuously generate the opening / closing execution mode, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 35 and to enter the second operation port 34 in the opening / closing execution mode. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of continuous occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is increased, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The special electric prize device 32, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 or a game ball flowing down can enter. Thus, for example, by turning the launch operation device 28 by a maximum operation amount so that the game ball flows down in the right area PA3, a prize is awarded to the special electric prize device 32, a prize is given to the second operation port 34, and a through It becomes possible to aim for winnings to the gate 35 collectively.

  When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is switched from one of the open state and the closed state to the other, the game ball can be inserted into the through gate 35. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level with respect to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the opening / closing execution mode, and to improve the interest of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in at a timing when the special prize winning device 32 is switched from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained only by making the positional relationship of the through gate 35 with respect to the special electricity prize winning device 32 as described above.

  When the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35. Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player has the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 as well as whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electricity prize winning device 32. In this state, attention is paid to whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

  The guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. The through gate 35 is placed on the game ball placed when the opening / closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed on the predetermined range X which is a part of the guide plate portion 214. Is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball by dropping downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, not only the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, but also the game ball placed thereon. At an exquisite timing when the opening / closing member 202 exists in the predetermined range X, the opening / closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position. Thereby, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  On the upstream side of the special prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided. A predetermined range X, which is a range in which a game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214, is set so as to be biased toward the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Thereby, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening / closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate 214. is there. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, in the special electric prize winning device 32, the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists on the left side of the predetermined range X, which is a range in which the game plate can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214. doing. As a result, game balls that are on the guide plate 214 but have not reached the entrance 45b enter the through gate 35. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 has not won the special electric prize device 32 is changed to a profit feeling that the winning to the through gate 35 occurs. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot result includes, for example, a 2R high-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result, and an opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high-precision result and an opening / closing execution triggered by the 16R high-precision result. The ease of entering a game ball into the through gate 35 differs depending on the mode. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the through gate 35 expects an opening / closing execution mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the through gate 35, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In a configuration in which a game ball can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize device 32 is opened and closed, for example, an opening / closing execution mode and a 16R high-accuracy result triggered by a 2R high-accuracy result are obtained. The opening / closing frequency of the special electric prize winning device 32 is different from the opening / closing execution mode triggered by this. Accordingly, the expected value of the game ball entering the through gate 35 is increased in the opening / closing execution mode in which the expected value of the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the opening / closing execution mode with a large number of opening / closing operations of the special prize winning device 32 will occur.

  When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, not only can a jackpot result be obtained, but a small hit result can be obtained, and the probability of a jackpot result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result. Accordingly, the opening / closing execution mode is easily generated by causing the game ball to enter the second working port 34. In this case, it is possible to enter the through gate 35 in a predetermined situation that causes the second working port 34 to be opened. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the second operation port 34 expects the occurrence of a predetermined situation, and can improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined situation is a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs once as described above, it is possible to cause a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode occurs continuously, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the low probability mode, the average display period of the game times that are executed based on the game balls entering the second operation port 34 and do not result in a jackpot result is the first operation port 33 in the low probability mode. It is the same as, approximately the same as, or less than the average period of the variable display period of the game times that are executed based on the game balls entering the game and do not result in a jackpot. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rate of digestion of the former game times from becoming extremely worse than the rate of digestion of the latter game times. However, in the case of having such a configuration and having a configuration in which the frequency at which the second operation port 34 is opened with respect to the game ball entering the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state, the low probability mode It is assumed that the game is performed with the aim of entering the game ball into the second working port 34. On the other hand, in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is impossible to enter a game ball into the through gate 35. Therefore, in the low probability mode, it is possible to play a game with the aim of entering the game ball into the first operation port 33.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of buffer that has been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the type of buffer that is described above. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d corresponds to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal. However, in the present embodiment, buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as an open / close execution mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a high probability mode signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

  The open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the high probability mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, the door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the sixteenth buffer 122m. It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the buffer 122p, and the management side CPU 112 receives the instructions from the main side CPU 63 to the thirteenth to sixteenth buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that the corresponding signals are input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

  First, “12”, which is the number of first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2001). Thereafter, an output process of the identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In the output process, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are displayed. By setting to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in an output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2003). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of winning balls set for the entrance portion corresponding to the type of signals. The type identification signal is output the same number of times. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2003, when the value of the recognition output counter is “12”, “11”, or “10”, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is “6”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, the corresponding entry portion does not exist and is blank, so “0” is set to the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a start trigger signal output process is executed (step S2004). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2005: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2003. The process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2008). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, an end trigger signal output process is executed (step S2009). In this output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2010), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2011). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003, and processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2011: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S2012). In the output processing, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are displayed. By setting to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2102). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, or if the process of step S2105 is executed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S2108).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process of step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether or not reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2109). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and the processing after step S2104 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES). Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2109: YES), the history setting process in step S2110 and the external output process in step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122l are stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 49A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49 (d) shows a period in which the output state of the open / close execution mode signal is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 49 (f) shows correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l. 49 shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the relationship is executed, FIG. 49G shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. Supported by the side CPU112 Indicating timing for engagement setting process (step S2107) is executed.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a), 49 (d), and 49 (e), the first signal is supplied at the timing t1. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output state of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2101 of the management process (FIG. 48) to enter the identification state as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49A from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49 (b) from the timing t5 to the timing t7. Thus, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49C from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49A from the timing t11 to the timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the timing t13 to timing t15, the timing t16 to timing t18, the timing t19 to timing t21, and the timing t22 to timing t24, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, as shown in FIG. 49G, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter in the management side RAM 114 at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49C from the timing t25 to the timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship relationship areas 123a to 123l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 49C, 49D, and 49E, the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal is LOW level. To HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2109 of the management process (FIG. 48), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of pitched portions having the same number of winning balls, the pitched portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if it is the structure where history information is stored like this 2nd embodiment, it becomes possible to distinguish the 1st operation mouth 33 and the 2nd operation mouth 34 in history information.

  In this embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is being performed, and the front door frame As for information corresponding to whether or not 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to these pieces of information without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. ing. In this case, only information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118g from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs as will be described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  Various parameters are triggered before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to vary the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, and the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for a plurality of calculation triggers are collected. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation opportunity.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d corresponds to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the eighth buffer 122h is opened and closed. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. An output instruction signal is input.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above various signals, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the calculation CPU of various parameters to the management CPU 112. The fact that the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input, respectively. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to perform various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  In the power failure information storage process, when a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2202). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, after executing the power failure process in step S2203, an infinite loop is established, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag in the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112. The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2301: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S2302 to S2306. As in steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 28), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . In step S2307, as in step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S2308, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2309, the external output in the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28), the total time is calculated. Then, the calculation result information in step S2308 and the calculation result information in step S2309 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S2311, the number of various balls entered during the opening / closing execution mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2312, Similarly to step S1012 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various entering balls is calculated in the open / close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. In step S2313, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S2314 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S2315, similar to step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various entering balls in the high probability mode is calculated, and in step S2316, the first Similarly to step S1016 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 being opened is calculated. In step S2317, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S2317 is written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2401: YES), the calculation result output process is executed (step S2402). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When various calculation results corresponding to occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

  Thereafter, a history information output process is executed (step S2403). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thus, by outputting not only various calculation results but also history information, it becomes possible for a worker using the reading apparatus to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, clear processing is executed (step S2404). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

  When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the management instruction CPU 112 calculates various parameters by changing the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and various parameters for a plurality of business days can be read together when the various parameters are read by the reading device.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information that can specify the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

  It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written in the calculation result memory 131. This makes it difficult to generate an event in which new history information becomes a write target to the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

  Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device is only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. . As a result, the amount of information output to the outside can be suppressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In various arithmetic processes, each process of step S2302 to step S2309, step S2311 to step S2313, and step S2315 to step S2317 of the power failure response process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter within the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within the reference range (step S2503). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage of the two parameters It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, assuming that the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only a predetermined parameter to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated by various calculation processes in step S2502.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the process of step S2504 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, or when the process of step S2504 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2505). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the processing of step S2505, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether or not the contents of the calculated various parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. Written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed, and the necessary storage capacity in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, an addition process of a ball entering counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. This is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 24). Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2603). If it is “500” or more (step S2603: YES), a subtraction process of the entrance counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2605). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic process is a process executed instead of the power failure response process in the third embodiment. Accordingly, the calculation process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the process of step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger for causing the management CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2801). When a negative determination is made in step S2801, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which no game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying by.

  If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S2804). If the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2803. The stop reference value is set to The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of “0” is “0”, the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, "1" is set in the time measurement flag (step S2805).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2803, when the process of step S2804 is executed, or when the process of step S2805 is executed, the time measurement flag in the main RAM 65 is set to “1” ( Step S2806: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (Step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after 1 addition is greater than or equal to the instruction reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to “0” (step S2809), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2810). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since the various parameters are calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in a situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure measured using RTC115 instead of the structure measured using a measurement counter whether the predetermined period passed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 25).

  Corresponding to a game ball having entered one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of the current processing time It is determined whether the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, an addition process of a ball entrance counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2902). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entering is specified based on the number of times stored. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2903). If it is “500” or more (step S2903: YES), the entrance counter subtraction process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2905). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and it is determined by the management CPU 112 whether or not the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the management CPU 112 uniquely determines the calculation trigger of various parameters. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute a process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a calculation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 50). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation result in the calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, the signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has been started, the signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has ended, the signal indicating that the high probability mode has started, and the high probability mode have ended. A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Is done.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the present embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to any of the entrance parts, and the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h starts the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the ninth corresponding relationship area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth corresponding relationship area 123j. Information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode is stored in the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth corresponding relationship area 123l, Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13 correspondence area 123m. Accordingly, in step S3001, “13” is set in the confirmation target counter.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, RTC information that is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

  If the maximum value is exceeded (step S3006: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3007). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as those in steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, state information takeover processing is executed (step S3009). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether the high probability mode is in effect, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It is determined whether or not there is. Then, the state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S3010). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In addition, after executing the clear process, the state information written in the management-side RAM 114 is read in step S3009. If state information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the history information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored. In addition to writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. When state information indicating that the high probability mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the history information indicating that the high probability mode is being stored. In addition to writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. When state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, a negative determination is made in step S3006, or if the process of step S3010 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3012). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the processing after step S3002 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subject to calculation of various parameters from becoming subject to computation of various parameters again.

  Even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage state information appropriately.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 141o to 144o of the respective areas 141 to 144.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operation. These are first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball to either the mouth 33 or the second working port 34 are input. Accordingly, signals corresponding to state information such as whether the opening / closing execution mode is being set, whether the high probability mode is being set, and whether the front door frame 14 is being opened are input to the eighth to tenth. The buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S3101 "10" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a status information signal is input (step S3102). Specifically, in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, as the corresponding relationship information, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, and the front door It is determined whether any of the information indicating the frame 14 is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, a state information setting process is executed (step S3103). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high probability mode is in operation is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information on the second state indicating that the high probability mode is in operation is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3102, the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is stored in a buffer to which an information signal different from the state information is input. Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not the numerical value information that has been changed from “0” to “1”. It is determined whether or not (step S3104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S3105). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for summation in the summation area 141 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the total first counter 141a is an addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S3106). If it is in the first state (step S3106: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the first state is added (step S3107). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 142a for the first state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability mode (step S3108). If it is in the second state (step S3108: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding second state is executed (step S3109). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 143a for the second state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S3110). If it is in the third state (step S3110: YES), a corresponding third state counter addition process is executed (step S3111). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is set. Can be added.

  When the process of step S3103 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S3104, when a negative determination is made at step S3110, or when the process of step S3111 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3113). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the processing after step S3102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  In this way, the configuration is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, so that in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment, the out port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the game, a process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the special electric prize device 32 such as step S1004, and the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 such as step S1005. Processing to calculate and processing to calculate the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 such as step S1006 are not required. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls that enter the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c are all general winning openings. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Accordingly, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the high probability mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117 are not provided in the management IC 66, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the entry RAM of the out port 24 a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65 that temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I / F 111. When an operation trigger of various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and reads the read history. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the calculation result memory 131 to the reading device, while the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a ball entering detection process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3202). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a pitching history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operating power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 (step S3203).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3205). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ten-award ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3206).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the second bit D2 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3208). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3209).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the special electric power detection sensor 45a makes one game It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, “1” is set in the special electricity winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3211). Further, 1 is added to the value of the special electricity prize counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3212). The special electric prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 as an incoming history. The value of the special electric prize counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special prize winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3215). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3216). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of entering the first operation port 33 as an entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the first operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3217).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3219). Further, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3220). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3221).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the out-port detection sensor 48a provides one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Retained.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game is executed by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3225).

  By performing the entry detection process as described above, the entry histories to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored in the respective entrance parts. Is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. There is no need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the general winning slot 31, and transfers the special winning prize counter from the main RAM 65 to the special winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the first operation port 33, read the number of balls entered from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the second operation port 34, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read number of balls. However, the number of balls entered in a state where the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of entered balls generated when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of balls entered during the opening / closing execution mode and the number of balls entered during the high probability mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the 18th parameter and the 21st parameter described in the first embodiment are used. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0”.

  Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but information on the number of balls entered as the ball entry history in the main RAM 65 is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure to be. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the entry history in each entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Similarly to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 151. The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the entry history of each entry that has been read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various parameters thus calculated. The notification light emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, but the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is changed to the outside of the substrate box 60a. The light emitting part 151 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, thereby notifying the light emitting unit 151 for notification without requiring the work of opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning mouth detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 16th buffer 122p is output with the output instruction signal. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode, and the front door frame A signal corresponding to 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal relating to the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o have not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals can be obtained by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the fact that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. First to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the car are input. Accordingly, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S3301, "7" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3302). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer 122a is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S3303). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, or if the process of step S3303 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3305). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3305: NO), the processing after step S3302 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing external output processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3401: YES), the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a are added to the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114. Among the counters 152o, the management CPU 112 sets the number of counters whose number information is to be output (step S3402). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this embodiment, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g as described above, “7” is set in the output target counter in step S3402. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S3403), and the history information is used. The number-of-times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information, and the n-th buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number-of-times information. It becomes a target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is a target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is a target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is “1”, the first correspondence relationship area 123a is a target for reading correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is a target for reading number information.

  Thereafter, an information output process is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S3403 and the number-of-times information read in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3407). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the processing from step S3403 onward is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to “0”.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process in step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, it is determined whether or not an operation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3501). The calculation is triggered when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and in the same way as in the fifth embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power receiving award. This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more as the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. An opportunity can be easily generated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, a notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as will be described later. Therefore, the game area PA up to that point can be obtained simply by performing the power OFF / ON operation. It is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entrance mode of the game balls in the game area PA by generating a calculation opportunity every time the total number of game balls entered reaches the trigger reference number of 500 or more. It becomes.

  When a calculation opportunity occurs (step S3501: YES), the entry history is read from the counter that is the entry target of the entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 (step S3501). S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3502 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry histories read in step S3502 as the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33. It is possible to specify which of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S3502. .

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S3503 are:
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are in the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S3504 on the assumption that the calculated various parameters are in the first range. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S3505). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a blue light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S3506). If only one of the conditions where the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, In step S3506, an affirmative determination is made that there are two ranges. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3506, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3508). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

  The light emission state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151 or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until. In addition, the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit is stopped. Even if 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, a light emission state corresponding to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 151 for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117 and the game balls in the game area PA can be read. It becomes possible to grasp the entrance mode.

  A notification light-emitting unit 151 is provided together with the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 accommodated in the board box 60a. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

  The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

  When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is established. The third notification state is entered when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming excessive, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped immediately after the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 is continued. It is good also as a structure by which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

  Also, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by confirming the notification light-emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode on the previous business day.

  The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the notification light emitting unit 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 54. It may be. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the universal figure display part 38a of the universal figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting part 151. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other one as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed in the special figure display unit 37a or the general map display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special-figure display unit 37a or the general-purpose display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where the notification light emitting unit 151 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting light emission part 151 is provided in the position which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 52. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for allowing the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second prize winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the respective winning results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode is different between the case where the jackpot result has a low probability result and the case where a jackpot result has a high probability result. Hereinafter, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment. 71 (a1) and 71 (a2) show the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 71 (b1) and 71 (b2) show the execution period of the round game, and FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. c2) indicates a period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state. 71 (a1), 71 (b1), and 71 (c1) are the opening / closing execution in the case of 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result. 71 (a2), 71 (b2) and 71 (c2) show the 2R high accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R high accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result and 16R high accuracy result. The execution aspect of the opening / closing execution mode in a certain case is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a1) and 71 (a2), the opening / closing execution mode is performed at the timing t1 in any of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the low probability result and the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the high probability result. The mode is started, and the first round game is executed from the timing t2 to the timing t3 as shown in FIGS. 71 (b1) and 71 (b2). The execution mode of each round game is the same except for the round game of the last execution time, in any of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a low probability result and the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a high probability result. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. 71 (c2), the special prize device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the open duration of the special prize device 32 in each round game is a game. It is set to 29 seconds, which is a period longer than the product of the ball firing period (0.6 seconds) and the round game winning maximum number (10).

  Thereafter, in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a low probability result, the round game of the last execution is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) from the timing t4 to the timing t5. The execution mode of this round game is the same as the execution mode of the previous round game. In other words, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is released once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in each round game is the game ball firing period (0.6 seconds) and the round game winning upper limit number ( It is set to 29 seconds, which is a period longer than the product of 10). Then, an ending period is generated from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result, the round game of the last execution is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b2) from the timing t4 to the timing t5. The special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened and closed several times so as to sandwich the interval period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), timing t4 to timing t11, timing t12 to timing t13, timing t14 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t17, timing t18. The special prize winning device 32 is opened over the timing of t19 and the timing of t20 to the timing of t5. Then, an ending period is generated from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In this case, at the timing of t4 to the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to the timing of t19, The opening duration is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning round games (10). Specifically, it is set to 1 second. In this relatively short open continuation period, the number of winnings in the special electricity prize winning device 32 is about one, and it is possible that no winning in the special electricity winning prize device 32 occurs. In addition, since the special prize winning device 32 is opened five times less than the number of the upper limit number of winnings in the relatively short opening continuation period, it is the timing when the last opening time in the relatively short opening continuation period ends. At the timing of t19, there is a low possibility that the special electric prize winning device 32 has won game balls for the upper limit number of winnings in the last round game. Therefore, the opening of the special prize winning device 32 after the timing of t20 occurs with a high probability.

  Further, the relatively short open duration is supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202 in a situation where the open / close member 202 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is disposed at the open position. The game ball is set to a period during which it can reach the predetermined range X of the guide plate portion 214. Then, the game ball that has reached the predetermined range X can fall below the opening / closing member 202 and win the through gate 35 when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. As a result, a game ball winning opportunity to the through gate 35 occurs every time the opening of the special electricity winning device 32 with a relatively short opening continuation period ends.

  The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 from the timing t20 to the timing t5 is set to a period longer than the relatively short opening continuation period. This relatively long open duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning prizes for round games (10), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to During the relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive a prize for the upper limit number of game balls. In addition, when a game ball win is given to the special electricity prize winning device 32 during the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 32 during the relatively short opening duration period, the special electricity prize winning due to the relatively long opening duration period is generated. In the middle of the opening round of the device 32, the possibility that the number of winnings in the special electricity winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution round will reach the upper limit number of winnings is increased.

  In the round game of the last execution time of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a high-accuracy result, after the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened five times with a relatively short opening continuation period as described above, a relatively long opening is continued. The special prize winning device 32 is opened once according to the period, and there is an interval period during which the special prize winning device 32 is in a closed state between the opening times. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the timing from t11 to t12, the timing from t13 to t14, the timing from t15 to t16, the timing from t17 to t18, and the timing from t19 to t20 The special prize-winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing. These interval periods are all the same, and specifically set to 1 second.

  As described above, in the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32 by opening / closing the special prize winning device 32 a plurality of times in the round game of the last execution round as described above. There are many opportunities for the opening / closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities for winning through the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving a high-accuracy result as compared to a low-accuracy result.

  In addition, since the opening and closing of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the round game of the last execution round is performed with a relatively short opening duration, the duration of the round game of the last round of execution becomes extremely long. It becomes possible not to be. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper prize limit number before the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 32 with a relatively short opening duration is completed. It becomes possible to.

Next, the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process in the present embodiment. Note that the special electricity start process is executed in step S1209 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 38). In steps S3601 to S3603, the special electricity start process (FIG. 42) in steps S1601 to S1603 in the first embodiment is performed. Execute the same process. When the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3604: YES), a round number setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round number setting process, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the current open / close execution mode. Specifically, if the result is 2R low-accuracy result or 2R high-accuracy result, “2” is set in the round counter. If the result is 4R low-accuracy result or 4R high-accuracy result, “4” is set in the round counter. If the result is low accuracy or 6R high accuracy, set the round counter to “6”. If the result is 10R low accuracy or 10R high accuracy, set the round counter to “10” and set the 16R low accuracy result or 16R high. If the result is positive, “16” is set in the round counter. If any small hit result is obtained, the value of the round counter is cleared to “0”.

  After that, the opening / closing number setting process is executed (step S3606). In the opening / closing frequency setting process in the special electricity start process, if any of the jackpot results, “1” is set in the opening / closing frequency counter of the main RAM 65 as the opening / closing frequency of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the first execution round game. If the current game result is the first small hit result, “1” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the second small hit result, the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “ 5 ”is set, and if the current game result is the third small hit result,“ 10 ”is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as those in steps S1606 to S1609 of the special electricity start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the special electric power release opening process in this embodiment. Note that the special electric release opening process is executed in step S1210 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38).

  When a prize is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S3701: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3702). If the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S3703: YES), it is necessary to end the current round game if it is a big win result, and if the result is a small win result, the current opening / closing The execution mode needs to be terminated. Accordingly, the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3704).

  Thereafter, on condition that the current open / close execution mode is any jackpot result (step S3705: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3706). Then, an opening / closing count setting process is executed (step S3707). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value is not set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, “1” is set to the open / close count counter of the main RAM 65 when the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, when the trigger for the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result, “6” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is 2 or more, “1” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. Also, a process for setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S3708). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, no value is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the main RAM 65 wins. “10” is set as the upper limit number of winnings for a new round game in the counter. After that, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes in steps S1703 to S1705 of the special electricity release process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, so that the special electric prize winning device 32 has an opening continuation period of the current opening times. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S3712). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3713). When the value of the opening / closing counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S3714: YES) and the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result (step S3715: YES), The value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3716). Moreover, the setting process of the frequency | count of opening / closing is performed (step S3717). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value is not set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, “1” is set to the open / close count counter of the main RAM 65 when the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, when the trigger for the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result, “6” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current round counter value is 2 or more, “1” is set in the open / close counter of the main RAM 65. Further, a process for setting the upper limit number of winnings is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, no value is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the main RAM 65 wins. “10” is set as the upper limit number of winnings for a new round game in the counter. Then, the process of step S3709-step S3711 is performed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special electric power closing process in the present embodiment. The special electric power closing process is executed in step S1211 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38).

  In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processes as those in steps S1801 to S1804 of the special electricity closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3801, or if the process of step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether or not both the round counter of the main RAM 65 and the open / close count counter of the main RAM 65 are “0” ( Step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed by determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), an opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S3807). In the setting process, if the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is the second small hit result, the information on the opening duration for the second small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. If the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is the third small hit result, information on the open duration for the third small hit result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In the setting process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any low probability result, the longest opening duration information (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. . Also, in the setting process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any high-precision result and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, information on the longest open duration (specifically 29 seconds) is obtained. Set to special figure special electric timer counter. In the setting process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any one of the high-precision results and the value of the round counter is “1”, the value of the opening / closing counter of the main RAM 65 is “6” to “6”. In the case of “2”, information on a relatively short open duration (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the value of the open / close counter of the main RAM 65 is “1”. Sets information on the relatively long open duration (specifically 6 seconds) in the special figure special timer counter.

  Thereafter, in steps S3808 to S3809, the same processes as steps S1810 to S1811 of the special electric power closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, in steps S3810 to S3812, the same processing as in steps S1812 to S1814 of the special electricity closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electricity prize device 32 by opening and closing the special electricity prize device 32 a plurality of times in the last round game. In many situations, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities for winning through the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving a high-accuracy result as compared to a low-accuracy result.

  In addition, since the first half of the round of the last run round game is performed using a relatively short open duration, the duration of the last run round game does not become extremely long. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper prize limit number before the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 32 with a relatively short opening duration is completed. It becomes possible to.

  In the round game of the last execution time in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the high-accuracy result, the opening continuation period of the last opening round of the special prize winning device 32 is a period longer than the relatively short opening continuation period. Is set to This relatively long open duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning prizes for round games (10), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to During the relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive a prize for the upper limit number of game balls. In addition, when a game ball win is given to the special electricity prize winning device 32 during the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 32 during the relatively short opening duration period, the special electricity prize winning due to the relatively long opening duration period is generated. In the middle of the opening round of the device 32, the possibility that the number of winnings in the special electricity winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution round will reach the upper limit number of winnings is increased.

<Another embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment>
The round game in which the special electricity winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or an intermediate round game. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the open | release time of the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 generate | occur | produces in multiple times in multiple round games.

  -It is not limited to the configuration in which the opening times of the relatively long opening duration occur after the opening times of the relatively short opening duration in one round game, the relatively short opening duration The opening times may only occur a plurality of times.

  -During a relatively short opening continuation period, although the game ball can reach the position on the guide plate 214 where the winning through the through gate 35 is possible, the ball entering the entrance 45b of the special prize winning device 32 It is good also as a structure set to the period when this is impossible or difficult. In this case, it is possible to cause a situation in which it is possible to win the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult to enter the entrance 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied not to a configuration in which a plurality of opening times occur in one round game but to a configuration in which only one opening time occurs in one round game.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the through gate 35 is provided below the special prize winning device 32 and the game ball is placed on the guide plate 214, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. However, in this embodiment, a target that can be won by the game ball is a ball entry part other than the through gate 35. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, the special prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The special prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201, an opening / closing member 202, and a guide member 203, as in the first embodiment. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening / closing member 202. As a result, the game ball flows down below the special prize winning device 32. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is placed in the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the portion 45. Further, in the right area PA3, a guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special prize winning device 32 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide nail group 241. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening / closing member 202.

  The through gate 35 is not provided below the special electricity prize device 32 in the right area PA3. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA, and when the left area PA2 is compared in the same manner of launch operation that the game ball will flow down, The frequency of entering the game ball is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, when a launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when a game ball is fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, a winning to the through gate 35 is possible, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning to the through gate 35 is won. When the state is reached, the winning to the second working port 34 is possible.

  Incidentally, in this embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the general electric utility 34a of the second working port 34. In the low frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric utility 34a is not in the open state or the frequency in which the general electric utility 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. The support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode if the result is low, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency support mode if the result is high. .

  A first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance 252 are provided below the special electric prize device 32 in the right area PA3. The first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are provided with openings that serve as entrances for game balls being opened vertically upward, and members that directly open and close these entrances. Is not provided. In addition, the game ball that has entered the first special entrance 251 is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the game ball that has entered the second special entrance 252. Is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. Further, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are juxtaposed side by side so that the first special entrance 251 is on the left side and the second special entrance 252 is on the right side. .

  The first special entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special entrance 251; A second special detection sensor 252a for detecting a game ball that has entered the second special entrance port 252 is provided. The first special detection sensor 251a and the second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed by the main CPU 63. The entrance ball inspection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

  When one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), 1 is added to the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3902). The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and 10 prize balls are awarded. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), 1 is added to the value of the five award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3904). The 5-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times of paying out 5 game balls. When the value of the five prize ball counter is 1 or more, a five prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) and five prize balls are awarded. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for five prize balls is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the five prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that five game balls are paid out.

  Note that other processing is also executed in the incoming ball detection processing (step S3905). In other processes, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S325 of the entrance detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Returning to the description of the game board 24 (FIG. 75), the first special entry port 251 is arranged near the passage formation body 201 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 on the downstream side of the special electricity prize winning device 32. In addition, a first guide nail group 253 is provided by a plurality of nails 24b between the opening / closing member 202 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 and the first special entrance hole 251. The first guide nail group 253 allows a game ball present on the left side of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special entrance 251, and from the first guide nail group 253. However, game balls that are present on the right are not allowed to enter the first special entrance 251. Accordingly, when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is present on the first range X1 near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202, the game Balls can enter the first special entrance 251, and other game balls cannot enter the first special entrance 251.

  The distance dimension along the guide plate 214 in the first range X1 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, is twice the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate 214 on the first range X1 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, or may be greater than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is good.

  The second special entrance 252 is arranged on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 at a position spaced to the left of the right end of the opening / closing member 202 although it is to the right of the first special entrance 251. In addition, a second guide nail group 254 is provided by a plurality of nails 24b between the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second special entrance port 252. The second guide nail group 254 allows a game ball present on the left side of the second guide nail group 254 to enter the second special entrance 252, and from the second guide nail group 254. However, the game balls present on the right are not allowed to enter the second special entrance 252. As a result, when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball exists on the second range X2 closer to the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202, the game ball is 2 It becomes possible to enter the special entrance 252, and other game balls cannot enter the second special entrance 252. In this case, even when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is present at a position to the right of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202, the game The ball does not enter the second special entrance 252. In addition, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening / closing member 202 at a position to the right of the second range X2, so that the game ball is in the second special entry. Do not enter the ball opening 252.

  The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the second range X2 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate 214 on the second range X2 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and is more than 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It is good also as a big structure.

  Next, how a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252 in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 77A shows a period in which the opening / closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32 is disposed in the open position, and FIG. 77B shows a game ball in the first range X1 on the guide plate 214 of the opening / closing member 202. 77 (c) shows a period in which a game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and FIG. 77 (d) shows a first special entry. The timing at which a game ball enters the ball opening 251 is shown, and FIG. 77 (e) shows the timing at which the game ball enters the second special entrance 252.

  First, a case where a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77A, the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position at the timing of t1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), there is a game ball in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214, and the game ball further flows down on the guide plate portion 214 from the timing t2 to the timing t3. As a result, a game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (b) from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Then, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77 (a) at the timing t4 when the game ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate 214. Thus, the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 as shown in FIG. 77 (d) at the timing of t5. Then, when a game ball enters the first special entrance 251, 10 game balls are paid out.

  Next, a case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252 will be described. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the opening / closing member 202 is arranged at the open position. Thereafter, a game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (c) from the timing t7 to the timing t8. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at the timing of t8, which is a situation where a game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214. Thus, the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 as shown in FIG. 77 (e) at the timing of t9. Then, when the game balls enter the second special entrance 252, payout of five game balls is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible not only to enter the game ball into the special electricity prize winning device 32 but also to enter the game ball into the special game entrances 251 and 252. The payout of the game ball is executed not only when the game ball enters the special electricity prize winning device 32 but also when the game ball enters the special entrance 251 and 252. As a result, the number of game balls to be paid out in the opening / closing execution mode can be increased, and the advantage of the opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

  The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are provided on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 and at positions where the inflow of game balls is possible at the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. ing. Thereby, the game ball leaked as a target for entry into the special electric prize winning device 32 enters the special entrance 251 and 252, and the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters the special entrance 251 and 252. Will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a player's disadvantageous feeling that a game ball leaked from a target to be entered by the special electric prize winning device 32 is generated.

  When the opening / closing member 202 of the special electricity prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 can enter the special entrance 251 and 252. It becomes. Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player has the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 as well as whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electricity prize winning device 32. In this state, attention is paid to whether or not the opening / closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode.

  At the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the special entrance 251 and 252 is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

  The guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. The special entrances 251 and 252 are placed when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game balls are placed in the partial ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate 214. The game ball is provided at a position where it can enter when it falls downward. In this case, in order for the game balls to enter the special entrances 251 and 252, not only the game balls are placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, but also the placement of the game balls. It is necessary to move the opening / closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing when the game balls are present in some of the ranges X1 and X2. Thereby, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  On the upstream side of the special prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided. The ranges X1 and X2 that allow the game balls to enter the special entrances 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214 are set so as to be biased toward the left end side of the opening and closing member 202. Thereby, in order for the game ball to enter the special entrance 251 and 252, the opening / closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate portion 214. I need to move. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, in the special electric prize winning device 32, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is located to the left of the ranges X1 and X2 that allow the game ball to enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214. Exists. As a result, game balls that are on the guide plate 214 but have not reached the entrance 45b enter the special entrances 251 and 252. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 did not win the special electric prize device 32, conversely, the winning to the special entrance 251 and 252 occurs. It becomes possible to change to a sense of profit.

  A first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance 252 are provided as the special entrances 251 and 252 that can enter when the opening / closing execution mode is set, and the first special entrance 251 is provided. The number of game balls to be paid out is different between the case where a game ball enters and the case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252. When the first condition is satisfied in the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when the second condition is satisfied in the opening / executing mode, the game is input to the second special entrance 252. A ball enters. Thus, the player not only expects the game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 in the opening / closing execution mode, but also enters the first special ball entrance 251 on the side where the number of game balls to be paid out is large. The game ball is expected to enter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode.

  The first special entrance 251 allows the game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in the first range X1 of the guide plate 214. In the position. The second special entrance 252 allows the game ball to enter when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed in the second range X2 of the guide plate 214. It is provided at the position. This not only expects the opening / closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in either the first range X1 or the second range X2, but further to the first range X1. It is expected that the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the configuration in which the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 by providing the guide nail group 241, the second range X2 is set to the lateral center of the opening / closing member 202. In addition, the first range X1 is set at a position biased to the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Further, an entrance 45b of the special electricity prize winning device 32 exists on the left side of the opening / closing member 202. As a result, the game balls present on the guide plate portion 214 near the entrance 45b of the special prize winning device 32 can easily enter the first special entrance 251 having a larger number of payouts. In this case, it is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the disadvantage is that the game ball has not entered the entrance 45b of the special prize winning device 32.

<Another embodiment of the fourteenth embodiment>
-It is good also as a structure by which only one is provided among the 1st special entrance 251 and the 2nd special entrance 252. Further, in addition to the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, a third special entrance is provided, which opens and closes when a game ball is placed in the third range of the guide plate 214. When the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, the game ball may enter the third special entrance.

  -Even if a game ball enters any of the first special entrance port 251 and the second special entrance port 252, it is not limited to a configuration in which only the game ball is paid out. When a game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first hold information or the second hold information that triggers the success / failure determination process is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 A configuration may be adopted in which payout of game balls is executed. In this case, a different privilege is given when the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when the game ball enters the second special entrance 252.

  For example, when a game ball enters the first special entrance 251, one of the first hold information and the second hold information is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. In some cases, the other of the first hold information and the second hold information may be acquired. Thereby, even if a game ball enters any of the special entrances 251 and 252, the hold information that triggers the success / failure determination process is acquired, but the type of the hold information acquired is the first special entrance The case where a game ball enters the mouth 251 is different from the case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252.

  Also, for example, even if a game ball enters either the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252, the hold information on the normal side is acquired, but the acquired hold on the normal side It is good also as a structure from which the probability that the 2nd operation port 34 will be in a public power open state with respect to information differs.

  The first range X1 is not limited to a configuration narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or substantially the same, The first range X1 may be configured to be wider than the second range X2.

  The game balls that have entered the special entrances 251 and 252 are not limited to the configuration led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the special entrances 251 and 252 are provided in a gate shape. Thus, the game balls that have entered the special entrances 251 and 252 may continue to flow down the game area PA thereafter. This makes it easier for the game ball to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a first special electricity prize winning device 261 and a second special electricity prize winning device 262 are provided. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3 of the game area PA, instead of the special electric prize device 32, a first special electric prize device 261 and a second special electric prize device 262 are provided. The first special electricity prize winning device 261 and the second special electricity prize winning device 262 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction such that the first special electricity prize winning device 261 is on the upper side and the second special electricity prize winning device 262 is on the lower side. Further, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as a ball-in part for generating an opportunity to open the general utility 34a of the second working port 34. A first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as a ball entrance that causes the object 34a to be opened. The first through gate 263 is provided on the left side of the first special electricity prize device 261, and the second through gate 264 is provided on the left side of the second special electricity prize device 262.

  The configuration of the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b). 79 (a) and 79 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG.

  A first grand prize opening 265 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first big prize opening 265 is formed is a position on the right side of the first through gate 263, although it is a position near the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3. A first special electric prize winning device 261 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 265. The first special electricity prize winning device 261 includes a first guide plate 271 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the first big prize opening 265. The first guide plate 271 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by driving means (not shown), and has a blocking position at which the amount of projection from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. Then, the position moves from the blocking position to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and moves to a guidance position where the amount of protrusion from the surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

  In the game board 24, a first ball receiving portion 272 is provided at a position above the right end portion of the first guide plate 271. Further, in the right area PA3, the first special electric prize winning device 261 is located above the right area from the upper area PA1. A first guide nail group 267 for guiding all of the game balls that have flowed into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 is provided (see FIG. 78). The first guide nail group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. All the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 by the first guide nail group 267 are guided to the first ball receiver 272. The distance between the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is determined by the diameter of the game ball. Is a large dimension. In this blocking position, the front end portion of the first guide plate 271 exists on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end portion of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in a state where the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the first ball receiving portion 272. In addition, the game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 jumps on the first ball receiving portion 272 so that the first guide plate 271 disposed at the blocking position is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface of the game board 24. It is also assumed that it is placed on the upper surface of the region that protrudes into the area. On the other hand, in the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the area protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 disposed at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the first big prize opening 265 and the first through gate 263 and the first guide plate. It will fall below the 1st guide plate 271 from between the front side edge part of 271, and the window panel 52. FIG. Due to the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position, the winning at the first big winning opening 265 is blocked and the winning at the first through gate 263 is blocked. Is done.

  When the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the distance dimension between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is larger than the radius of the game ball. Is also a small dimension. And in this guidance position, the front side edge part of the 1st guidance board 271 exists in the front side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the front side edge part of the 1st ball receiving part 272. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in a state where the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position projects to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the first guide plate 271. It will rest on the upper surface of the area.

  When the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position, the upper surface of the projecting region 273 that projects to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 274 is formed. With the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the projecting region 273 is the first guiding region 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the left side of the first guiding region 275, and is the first grand prize. A second induction region 276 that leads to the mouth 265, and a third induction region 277 that is to the left of the first induction region 275 and in front of the second induction region 276 and continues to the first through gate 263. Yes. The upper surface of the first guiding region 275 is inclined downward toward the left. In addition, the left end of the first guide region 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guide region 276 and the right end of the third guide region 277. Thereby, the game ball guided from the first ball receiving portion 272 to the first guide region 275 flows down to the second guide region 276 or the third guide region 277 by its own weight. In this case, the range in contact with the right end of the second guide region 276 at the left end of the first guide region 275 is wider than the range in contact with the right end of the third guide region 277 at the left end of the first guide region 275. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guidance area 275 flows more easily into the second guidance area 276 than the third guidance area 277. However, the game ball guided by the first guide area 275 flows into the third guide area 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four).

  In the second guiding area 276, the upper surface is inclined downward toward the left rear so that the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 is guided to the first grand prize winning opening 265. Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 276 is likely to win the first big prize opening 265. The game ball that has won the first big prize opening 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first big prize opening 265. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of winning in the first big winning opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result that the first grand prize opening 265 is to be released, it is specified that one game ball has entered the first big prize opening 265 In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65. When the value of the winning counter is “0”, it is determined that winnings corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings have occurred as in the first embodiment, and an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small hit result is set. Terminate.

  The third guiding area 277 is inclined downward toward the left. Here, when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position, the first guide plate 271 exists from the right end portion of the right area PA3 to the right end position of the first through gate 263 in the lateral position. Will be. In addition, as described above, the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 disposed at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding region 277 moves to the second guiding region 276 for some reason, the game ball flows down toward the first through gate 263 due to its own weight, and enters the first through gate 263. Win a prize. A game ball won in the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize for the first through gate 263 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, it is assumed that the upper limit number of holding information on the map side is not stored in the map holding area 65c. The numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c as general-purpose information.

  Due to the above configuration, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game that is controlled by the first special prize winning device 261 or the small hit result that is controlled by the first special prize winning device 261, the first guide plate 271 is When placed in the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to one of the first grand prize opening 265 and the first through gate 263, and the first big prize opening 265 and the first through gate 263 Winning to any one will surely occur. When a winning at the first big winning opening 265 occurs, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings is decremented by 1 and the payout of 15 game balls as a specific number is executed as in the first embodiment. The When a winning to the first through gate 263 occurs, an opportunity to acquire the hold information on the normal side occurs. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is controlled, the player both receives a prize at the first big prize opening 265 and generates a prize at the first through gate 263. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the configuration of the second special electricity prize winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.80 (a) is the BB sectional drawing of FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a second big prize opening 266 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second big prize opening 266 is formed is a position below the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the first through gate 263 and a position vertically below the first big prize winning opening 265. In addition, the position where the second big prize winning opening 266 is formed is a position on the right side of the second through gate 264 although it is a position near the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3.

  A second special electric prize winning device 262 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the second grand prize winning port 266. The second special electricity prize winning device 262 includes a second guide plate 281 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the second big prize winning opening 266. The second guide plate 281 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving means (not shown), and has a blocking position at which the projection amount from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. Then, the position moves from the blocking position to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and moves to a guidance position where the amount of protrusion from the surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

  In the game board 24, a second ball receiving portion 282 is provided above the right end portion of the second guide plate 281. Further, in the right area PA3, above the second special electricity winning device 262, the first grand prize is won. A second guide nail group 268 is provided for guiding all of the game balls that have flowed below the first special electric prize winning device 261 to the second ball receiving portion 282 without winning the opening 265 and the first through gate 263. (See FIG. 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. All the game balls that have flowed down below the first special electricity prize winning device 261 in the right area PA3 are guided to the second ball receiving portion 282 by the second guide nail group 268. The distance between the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the distance dimension between the front end portion of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, like the first guide plate 271. Larger dimensions. In this blocking position, the front end portion of the second guide plate 281 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end portion of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in a state where the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the second ball receiving portion 282. Further, the game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 jumps on the second ball receiving portion 282 and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 in the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position. It is also assumed that it is placed on the upper surface of the region that protrudes into the area. On the other hand, in the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the area protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the second big prize opening 266 and the second through gate 264 and the second guide plate. It falls below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of 281 and the window panel 52. Due to the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the winning at the second large winning opening 266 is blocked and the winning at the second through gate 264 is blocked. Is done.

  When the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 80A, the distance dimension between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the radius of the game ball. Is also a small dimension. And in this guidance position, the front side edge part of the 2nd guide plate 281 exists in the front side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the front side edge part of the 2nd ball receiving part 282. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in a state where the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the second guide plate 281. It will rest on the upper surface of the area.

  When the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position, the upper surface of the projecting region 283 that projects to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 is a boundary part for changing the tilt direction of the upper surface. 284 is formed. With the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 283 is the first guiding region 285 that exists in front of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the left side of the first guiding region 285, and is the second grand prize. A second guiding region 286 that leads to the mouth 266, and a third guiding region 287 that is to the left of the first guiding region 285 and in front of the second guiding region 286 and continues to the second through gate 264. Yes. The upper surface of the first guiding area 285 is inclined downward toward the left. The left end of the first guiding area 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guiding area 286 and the right end of the third guiding area 287. As a result, the game ball guided from the second ball receiving portion 282 to the first guiding area 285 flows down to the second guiding area 286 or the third guiding area 287 by its own weight. In this case, the range in contact with the right end of the second guide region 286 at the left end of the first guide region 285 is wider than the range in contact with the right end of the third guide region 287 at the left end of the first guide region 285. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guidance area 285 flows more easily into the second guidance area 286 than the third guidance area 287. However, the game ball guided by the first guide area 285 flows into the third guide area 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one out of seven).

  The second guiding area 286 is inclined downward toward the left rear so that the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 guides the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 to the second grand prize opening 266. Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 286 is likely to win the second big prize opening 266. The game ball that has won the second big prize opening 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second big prize opening 266. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize at the second big prize opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small hit result that the second big prize opening 266 is to be opened, it is specified that one game ball has entered the second big prize opening 266 In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65. When the value of the winning counter is “0”, it is determined that winnings corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings have occurred as in the first embodiment, and an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small hit result is set. Terminate.

  The third guiding area 287 is inclined downward toward the left. Here, when the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position, the second guide plate 281 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264 in the lateral position. Will be. Further, as described above, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 disposed at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 287 moves to the second guiding area 286 for some reason, the game ball flows down toward the second through gate 264 by its own weight, and enters the second through gate 264. Win a prize. A game ball won in the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize for the second through gate 264 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, it is assumed that the upper limit number of hold information on the map side is not stored in the map holding area 65c. The numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 65c as general-purpose information.

  Due to the above configuration, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game that is controlled by the second special electricity prize winning device 262 or the small hit result that is controlled by the second special electricity prize winning device 262, the second guide plate 281 is When arranged in the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to either the second big prize opening 266 or the second through gate 264, and the second big prize opening 266 and the second through gate 264 Winning to any one will surely occur. When a winning to the second big winning opening 266 occurs, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings is decremented by 1 and payout of 15 game balls, which is a specific number, is executed as in the first embodiment. The When a winning to the second through gate 264 occurs, an opportunity to acquire the hold information on the normal side occurs. As a result, when the second special electricity prize winning device 262 is controlled, the player both receives a prize at the second big prize opening 266 and a prize at the second through gate 264. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the first special electricity prize winning device 261 and the second special electricity prize winning device 262 are compared with each other with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). FIG. 80A is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 78 as already described, and shows the second special prize winning device 262 in the case where the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position, and FIG. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA, and shows the first special prize winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position.

  As shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the first guide plate 271 has the same left edge as the first guide region 275 and the second guide plate 281 has the same left end as the first guide region 275. Or it is substantially the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guide region 277 is in contact with the entire left end of the first guide region 275 in the first guide plate 271 is the ratio of the first guide region 285 in the second guide plate 281. It is larger than the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guiding region 287 is in contact with the entire left end. Then, a game placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 when the first special prize winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position) in relation to the configuration. The probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is the probability that the second guide plate 281 is in a state where the second special prize winning device 262 is opened (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position). The probability that the game ball placed on the upper surface is guided to the second through gate 264 is higher. Conversely, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the guide position), the game ball placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 is the first grand prize. The probability of being guided to the mouth 265 is a game that is placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 when the second special prize winning device 262 is in an open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is disposed at the guide position). The probability that the ball is guided to the second grand prize opening 266 is lower. As a result, according to the type of the special electricity prize winning device that is the control target of the first special electricity winning equipment 261 and the second special electricity prize winning device 262, the likelihood of winning a prize to the big prize winning openings 265, 266 and the through gate 263 is increased. , 264, it is possible to vary the easiness of winning.

  As described above, the first guide nail group 267 is provided above the first special electric prize winning device 261, and the first guide nail group 267 is located in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 from the right end of the variable display unit 36. It extends over (see FIG. 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided in the right region PA3 below the first guide nail group 267 and at the left side of the first special prize winning device 261. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 does not win the first through gate 263 without passing through the area where the first special electric prize winning device 261 is provided.

  On the other hand, the second guide nail group 268 provided between the first special electricity prize winning device 261 and the second special electricity prize winning device 262 receives the game balls flowing below the first special electricity prize winning device 261 in the second ball receiving portion 282. Although provided so as to guide, the second guide nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side from the left end of the first special prize winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). A second through gate 264 is provided at a position vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured such that a game ball passes through a gate hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can win the second through gate 264, and the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can easily win the second through gate 264. When one game ball wins the first through gate 263 and wins the second through gate 264, it is common on the condition that the upper limit number of holding information on the normal drawing side is not acquired in the general drawing holding area 65c. Two pieces of hold information on the figure side are acquired. Therefore, also from this point, the hold information on the normal map side is more easily acquired when the first special electricity prize winning device 261 becomes the control object than when the second special electricity prize winning device 262 becomes the control object.

  Next, the contents of the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 81 (a) shows a low probability table for the first special figure, FIG. 81 (b) shows a high probability table for the first special figure, and FIG. 81 (c) is for the second special figure. A low accuracy table is shown, and FIG. 81 (d) shows a high accuracy table for the second special figure.

  As in the first embodiment, as the first special figure acceptance table, as shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the first special figure low probability decision table and the first special figure are used. And a high-accuracy determination table. In the low probability table for the first special figure and the high probability table for the first special figure, only the jackpot result and the off result are set as game results. The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set higher than that in the low probability table for the first special figure.

  As in the first embodiment, as the second special figure acceptance table, as shown in FIGS. 81 (c) and 81 (d), the second special figure low probability decision table and the second special figure are used. And a high-accuracy determination table. In the low probability table for the second special figure and the high probability table for the second special figure, the jackpot result, the first small hit result, and the second small hit result are set as game results. . The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set to be higher in the high probability table for the second special chart than in the low probability table for the second special chart. On the other hand, the probability that one of the first small hit result and the second small hit result is selected is set higher in the low probability table for the second special figure than in the high probability table for the second special figure. ing.

  Next, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode will be described. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82A, the jackpot result is a 2R low-accuracy result, 2R high-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R. There are low accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, 10R low accuracy results, 10R high accuracy results, 16R low accuracy results, and 16R high accuracy results. The number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings in round games, the opening continuation period and the interval period of each round game in the case where each of these jackpot results is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the types of special prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the open / close execution mode differ depending on the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode triggered by any of 2R high-accuracy results, 4R high-accuracy results, 6R high-accuracy results, 10R high-accuracy results, and 16R high-accuracy results, the first special electric prize winning device is used in each round game. 261 is a control target, whereas in the open / close execution mode triggered by either 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, or 16R low-accuracy result, each round game Thus, the second special electricity prize winning device 262 becomes a control target. As a result, the hold information on the normal map side is more easily acquired in the opening / closing execution mode than the case where the result with high accuracy results in the low accuracy result. On the other hand, it is more difficult to win the winning prize openings 265 and 266 in the opening / closing execution mode when the result with a high probability results in a result with a low probability.

  Here, the open duration of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number of winnings for each round game is set to 10. In this case, since the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric prize winning device 261 by the end of the open duration of each round game. On the other hand, as described above, three game balls out of the four game balls guided to the first guide area 275 of the first guide plate 271 in the first special electric prize winning device 261 are the first big prize opening 265. And one game ball wins the first through gate 263. Then, 36 out of 48, which is 3/4, is calculated to be guided to the first big winning opening 265, and this number is larger than the upper limit number of winnings. Therefore, even if the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes a control target, the upper limit number of game balls in each round game can win the first big prize opening 265. Incidentally, during the period in which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide positions in each round game, the game balls that have reached the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. When the game ball reaches the ball receiving portions 272 and 282, it is set to a period longer than the shortest period required from the left end of the guide plates 271 and 281 to fall toward the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. Has been.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit result and the second small hit result are set as the small hit results as shown in FIG. In the case of these small hit results, the upper limit number of winnings in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening continuation period, the number of opening times, and the interval period are all the same. On the other hand, the types of special prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the opening / closing execution mode differ depending on the type of the small hit result. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the first special electricity winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the second special electricity The winning device 262 is a control target. As a result, the hold information on the normal map side is more easily acquired in the opening / closing execution mode when the first small hit result is obtained than when the second small hit result is obtained. On the other hand, it is more difficult to win the winning prize openings 265 and 266 in the open / close execution mode when the first small hit result is the second small hit result. By the way, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 during the period in which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide positions in each opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264, the game ball reaches the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 and then falls from the left end of the guide plates 271 and 281 toward the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. It is set to a period longer than the minimum period required.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the opening setting process for special electricity executed by the main CPU 63. The opening setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special electricity start process (FIG. 42) and in step S1810 of the special electricity closing process (FIG. 44).

  First, it is determined whether or not the current control target is the first special electricity prize winning device 261 (step S4001). When the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by any high-accuracy result or first small hitting result, the first special electric prize winning device 261 is a control target, and the current opening / closing execution mode is any low-accuracy result or When the second small hit result is used as an opportunity, the second special power prize winning device 262 is a control target.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the first special electricity prize winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the drive means of the first special electricity prize winning device 261 so that the first guide plate 271 of the first special electricity prize winning device 261 is arranged at the guidance position. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the second special electricity prize winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the second special electricity prize winning device 262 so that the second guide plate 281 of the second special electricity prize winning device 262 is arranged at the guidance position. As a result, the special prize winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the jackpot result or the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode are opened.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the game balls can be inserted into the through gates 263 and 264 when the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state, the game is executed when the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state. The player expects both winnings in the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 and winnings in the through gates 263 and 264. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are open.

  The through gates 263 and 264 are game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 arranged at the guide positions, and the games that have flowed down on the guide plates 271 and 272 to a side different from the side of the prize winning openings 265 and 266. It is provided at a position where the ball can enter. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the player's attention to the game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the guide plates 271 and 272 by the guide nail groups 267 and 268. In this case, the special winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 are provided on the left side of the guide plates 271 and 272. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the state that the game ball flows down on the guide plates 271 and 272.

  The area of the guide plates 271 and 272 that allows game balls to enter the through gates 263 and 264 is located to the left of the big winning openings 265 and 266, that is, ahead of the game balls flowing down on the guide plates 271 and 272. Exists on the side. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 has not won the prize winning holes 265 and 266 is generated, and conversely, winning to the through gates 263 and 264 occurs. It becomes possible to change to a sense of profit for.

  A first special electric prize device 261 and a second special electric prize device 262 are provided as special electric prize devices 261 and 262, and a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as through gates 263 and 264. Yes. And, it is possible to win the first through gate 263 by being guided by the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric prize device 261, and by being guided by the second guide plate 272 of the second special electric prize device 262. Winning to the second through gate 264 is possible. In this case, by entering different types of special electricity prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are targets of execution of opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode, the percentages of game balls that enter the special electricity prize winning devices 261 and 262 and through gates 263 and 264, respectively. Can be made different.

  The probability that the game ball placed on the first guide plate 271 enters the first through gate 263 is different from the probability that the game ball placed on the second guide plate 272 enters the second through gate 264. . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the special prize winning devices 261 and 262 for which the opening / closing control is executed.

  For example, the 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result differ in the types of special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are targets of execution of the open / close control in the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of game result that triggers the execution of the opening / closing execution mode.

  The second through gate 264 is present downstream of the first through gate 263 in the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes an execution target of the opening / closing control, not only the game ball can enter the first through gate 263 but also the game ball enters the second through gate 264. Will get. Therefore, the player who expects to acquire the hold information on the normal side expects that the first special electric prize winning device 261 is an execution target of the opening / closing control.

  The same privilege of obtaining the hold information on the normal side is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first through gate 263 or the game ball enters the second through gate 264. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the disadvantage that the player feels regardless of which of the first special electricity prize winning device 261 and the second special electricity prize winning device 262 is to be executed.

<Another embodiment of the fifteenth embodiment>
-It is good also as a structure by which the kind of special electricity prize apparatus 261,262 used as the execution object of opening / closing control is changed in the middle of one opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the ratio of the expected winning degree of the winning prize openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  The game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball can enter the second through gate 264, and the game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 can enter the second through gate 264. A configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to enter a ball and a game ball that has entered the second through gate 264 cannot enter the first through gate 263.

  -Although it was set as the structure by which the member which directly opens and closes the big prize opening 265,266 is not provided, it is good also as a structure by which the member which directly opens and closes the big prize opening 265,266 is provided. For example, when the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position, the first guide plate 265 is confronted at a position close to the first big prize port 265 so as to close the first big prize port 265 from the front. When 271 is arranged at the guidance position, the first guidance plate 271 has a position that does not hinder the flow of the game ball toward the first big prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263 on the first guidance plate 271. It is good also as a structure provided in the board 271. FIG. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first big prize opening 265 in a situation where the first guide plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the through gate 35 is provided below the special prize winning device 32 and the game ball is placed on the guide plate 214, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. However, in this embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric prize device 32, but two special electric prize devices 32 are arranged vertically. It is installed. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA, and when the left area PA2 is compared in the same manner of launch operation that the game ball will flow down, The frequency of entering the game ball is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, when a launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when a game ball is fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, a winning to the through gate 35 is possible, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning to the through gate 35 is won. When the state is reached, the winning to the second working port 34 is possible.

  Incidentally, in this embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the general electric utility 34a of the second working port 34. In the low frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric utility 34a is not in the open state or the frequency in which the general electric utility 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. The support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode if the result is low, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency support mode if the result is high. .

  In the right area PA3, two special electricity prize winning devices 32 are arranged vertically. These special prize winning devices 32 are provided with a passage forming body 201, an opening / closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening / closing member 202. As a result, the game ball flows down below the special prize winning device 32. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is placed in the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the portion 45. In the following description, the upper special electric prize winning device 32 is referred to as a first special electric prize winning device 291, and the lower special electric prize winning device 32 is referred to as a second special electric prize winning device 292.

  The first special electric prize device 291 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA above the second special electric prize device 292. In the right region PA3, a guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are guided by the guide nail group 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the first special electric prize winning device 291. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening / closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is disposed at the open position and the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is the first. In the case where it is basically prevented from flowing down below the special prize winning device 291, the opening / closing member 202 of the first special prize winning device 291 is disposed at the closed position, and the first special prize winning device 291 is in the closed state. Is allowed to flow down to the lower side of the first special electricity prize winning device 291.

  The second special electricity prize winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 in the right region PA3. The lower guide nail group 293 is configured to guide the game ball that has flowed below the first special electricity prize winning device 291 from the side of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 toward the right end of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 from the side of the passage forming body 201. It is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b downwardly to the right end side of the 2 special electricity prize winning device 292. As a result, the game ball that has flowed below the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special electricity prize winning device 292 by the lower guide nail group 293. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening / closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is disposed in the open position and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right region PA3 is the second. It is basically prevented from flowing down below the special prize winning device 292, when the opening / closing member 202 of the second special prize winning device 292 is disposed at the closed position and the second special prize winning device 292 is in the closed state. Are allowed to flow down to the lower side of the second special prize winning device 292.

  FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the opening setting process for special electricity executed by the main CPU 63. The open setting process for special electricity is executed in step S1608 of the special electricity start process (FIG. 42) and in step S1810 of the special electricity closing process (FIG. 44).

  In the opening setting process for special electricity, the opening setting process of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is first executed (step S4101). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is in an open state. Further, the opening setting process of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is opened. As a result, the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are opened simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, at the start of each round game, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, At the start, both the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are opened.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing a special power closing setting process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the special electricity closing setting process is executed in step S1704 of the special electric release open process (FIG. 43).

  In the special electricity closing setting process, first, the closing setting process of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is executed (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in a closed state. Further, the closing setting process of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is executed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is in a closed state. As a result, the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are closed at the same time or substantially simultaneously. That is, in this embodiment, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, at the end of each round game, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, At the end, both the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are closed.

  Incidentally, although explanation by illustration is omitted, in the special electric release opening process (FIG. 43), when a game ball has won one of the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, in step S1706. Make an affirmative decision. In this case, if the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are simultaneously awarded, the value of the prize counter is decremented by 2 in step S1707, and a prize is generated in one of them. If YES in step S1707, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter. Further, in the special electric power closing process (FIG. 44), if the result is a small hit result, and the game ball has won any one of the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. Affirmative determination. In this case, if a prize is generated at the same time in the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292, the value of the prize counter is subtracted by 2 in step S1802, and a prize is generated in either one of them. If YES in step S1802, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter.

  Next, the manner in which the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are opened and closed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 86 (a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86 (b) shows the period when the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is open, and FIG. 86 (c) shows the second special electricity prize winning device 292. FIG. 86 (d) shows the period when the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 reaches the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electricity prize winning device 292. FIG. The shortest period assumed as a required period is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the round game is executed at each of timings t1 to t2, timings t3 to t5, and timings t6 to t8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86 (b) and FIG. 86 (c), both the first special electric prize apparatus 291 and the second special electric prize apparatus 292 are simultaneously at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6. It becomes an open state, and both the first special electricity prize device 291 and the second special electricity prize device 292 are simultaneously closed at the timings t2, t5, and t8.

  In this configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 at the timing t2 when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is closed and the timing t5. Is done. The game ball falls downward without winning the first special electric prize winning device 291. In this case, the shortest period assumed as the period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is the respective special electric power. The distance between the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is set to be longer than the interval period between one opening time of the winning devices 291 and 292 and the next opening time. Has been. In addition, as already described, a lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292, and the game balls that have flowed under the first special electricity prize winning device 291 are as follows. The position of the second special prize winning device 292 is reached by lowering the inclination on the lower guide nail group 293 by its own weight. As a result, the time required for the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is longer than the case where the game ball falls vertically. It has been extended for a long time.

  Due to the above configuration, the game balls that have dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electricity prize device 291 toward the second special electricity prize device 292 at the timing of t2 are shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d). As shown, the second special electricity prize winning device 292 arrives at the second special electricity prize winning device 292 at a timing t4 which is a timing later than the timing t3 when the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is again opened. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d), the game ball that has dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 toward the second special electricity prize winning device 292 at the timing of t5 The second special electricity prize winning device 292 arrives at the second special electricity prize winning device 292 at a timing t7 which is a timing later than the timing t6 at which the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is again opened.

  In each round game, when the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is closed, the number of game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is about two, which is less than the maximum number of winning prizes. . Therefore, the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is not closed before the game ball dropped from the first special electricity prize winning device 291 wins the second special electricity prize winning device 292.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3, the first special electricity prize winning device 291 at each opening time in the opening / closing execution mode. And the period when both the 2nd special electricity prize-winning devices 292 are in an open state occurs. Thereby, the game ball that has failed to enter the first special electricity prize winning device 291 in the open state can enter the second special electricity prize winning device 292 in the open state. Therefore, it is difficult to cause a ball leakage to the special prize winning devices 291 and 292 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A game ball that could not enter the first special electric prize winning device 291 even though it reached the position of the first special electric prize winning device 291 at the timing when each opening round ends, The first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are provided so that the player can enter the second special electricity prize winning device 292. As a result, the game ball that has entered and leaked into the first special electricity prize winning device 291 at a predetermined opening time can enter the second special electricity prize winning device 292 at the next opening time, and the special electricity prize winning device 291 in the opening / closing execution mode. It is difficult for a ball to enter 292 to leak.

  In one opening / closing execution mode, the game ball reaches the position of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 from the position of the first special electricity prize winning device 292 during the period from the end of the predetermined opening time to the start of the next opening time. It is set to a period shorter than the period required to do so. As a result, a game ball that has leaked into the first special electricity prize winning device 291 at a predetermined opening time can enter the second special electricity prize winning device 292 at the next opening time. In addition, it is possible to realize a configuration for making it difficult for such a ball leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292.

  In the configuration as described above, when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 is disposed at the open position, the inflow of game balls to the downstream side of the opening / closing member 202 is prevented, and the second special electricity prize winning prize is obtained. When the opening / closing member 202 of the device 292 is disposed at the open position, the inflow of game balls to the downstream side of the opening / closing member 202 is blocked. Then, when each opening time is started, the first special electricity winning device 291 and the second special electricity winning device 292 are simultaneously opened, and when each opening time is finished, the first special electricity winning device 291 and the second special electricity are received. The winning device 292 is simultaneously closed. This makes it possible to suppress the number of game balls that are discharged to the out port 24a without winning the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292 are simultaneously opened and simultaneously closed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing an increase in processing load for controlling opening / closing of the special prize winning devices 291 and 292.

<Another embodiment of the sixteenth embodiment>
The first special prize winning device 291 and the second special prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which the opening state is simultaneously opened at the start of each opening round, and are distinguished by the appearance although the timing of the opening state is slightly different. It is good also as a structure substantially the same so that it is difficult, and it is good also as a structure from which the timing which becomes an open state is different so that it can distinguish visually. In this configuration, in order for a game ball that has leaked into the first special electricity prize device 291 to enter the second special electricity prize device 292, the timing at which the second special electricity prize device 292 is opened is the first special electricity prize. It is preferable that it is ahead of the timing when the device 291 is opened.

  The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which the closed state is simultaneously closed at the end of each opening round, and are distinguished by the appearance although the timing of the closed state is slightly different. It is good also as a structure which is substantially the same to the extent to which it is hard, and it is good also as a structure from which the timing which becomes a closed state is different so that it can distinguish visually.

  When the first special prize winning device 291 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 may be reliably prevented from flowing downstream from the first special prize winning device 291. For example, when the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape that does not have the opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 is a game board when disposed in the closed position. In the case where the game board 24 is in a state of being sunk rearward from the board surface 24 and is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, except for the game balls placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the first special electric prize winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game balls flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the first special electric prize winning device 291.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration, when the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is in an open state, it is certain that the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 will flow downstream from the second special electricity prize winning device 292. It is good also as a structure blocked | prevented by. For example, when the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape that does not have the opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 is a game board when disposed in the closed position. In the case where the game board 24 is in a state of being sunk rearward from the board surface 24 and is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, when the second special electricity prize winning device 292 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the second special electricity prize winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game balls flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the second special electric prize winning device 292.

  -It is not limited to the structure by which the lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the 1st special electric prize apparatus 291 and the 2nd special electric prize apparatus 292, The said lower guide nail group 293 is not provided It is good also as a structure. Even in this case, the game ball reaches the position of the second special electricity prize winning device 292 from the position of the first special electricity prize winning device 291 with respect to the distance between the first special electricity prize winning device 291 and the second special electricity prize winning device 292. By setting the shortest period required until the first special electric prize winning device 291 is set to be longer than the interval period of each opening of the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292, the game balls leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 are set to the second It is possible to enter the special electric prize winning device 292.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the configuration for allowing all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode to win the special electricity prize winning device. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted. In this embodiment, there is no hit result.

  FIG. 87 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the special prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3 of the game board 24, a first special electricity prize winning device 301 and a second special electricity prize winning device 302 are arranged in parallel vertically. Each of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 includes large winning holes 301a and 302a through which game balls can be inserted, and also includes open / close doors 301b and 302b for opening and closing the large winning holes 301a and 302a. The open / close doors 301b and 302b can be switched between an open position and a closed position by being driven by the special electric drive sections 301c and 302c. When the open / close doors 301b and 302b are arranged at the closed position, it is impossible to enter the game balls into the big winning openings 301a and 302a, and the open / close doors 301b and 302b are arranged at the open position to win a big prize. It is possible to enter game balls into the mouths 301a and 302a. The game balls that have entered the winning prize openings 301a and 302a are detected by the detection sensors 301d and 302d. Even in this embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment, both the first special electricity prize device 301 and the second special electricity prize device 302 are simultaneously opened at the start of the round game, and the first special electricity at the end of the round game. Both the winning device 301 and the second special electricity winning device 302 are simultaneously closed.

  Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, when the first special electricity prize winning device 301 is in an open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is surely awarded to the first special electricity prize winning device 301. In the right area PA3, an area upstream of the first special electricity prize winning device 301 is set. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down below the first special electricity prize-winning device 301 has the right region so that if the second special electricity prize-winning device 302 is in an open state at that time, it will surely win the second special electricity prize-winning device 302. In PA3, an area between the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 is set.

  A flow-off prevention member 303 is provided between the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 in the right region PA3. The flow-down prevention member 303 is driven by the prevention driving unit 304 so that it can move between a retracted position that does not protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24 and a prevention position that protrudes forward from the board surface of the game board 24. ing. When the flow-down prevention member 303 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower side of the first special electricity prize winning device 301 is not obstructed by the flow-down prevention member 303 and moves to the second special electricity prize winning device 302 side. And flow down. On the other hand, when the flow-down prevention member 303 is disposed at the blocking position, all the game balls that have flowed down to the lower side of the first special electricity prize winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the flow-down prevention member 303 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 It is prevented from flowing down to the side.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a flow prevention control process executed by the main CPU 63. The flow prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The current round game is a round game different from the final round game (step S4301: YES), and the prevention start period (specifically 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the current round game (Step S4302: YES), the drive control process for starting prevention is executed (Step S4303). Thereby, the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged from the retracted position to the prevention position. The prevention start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the game ball firing period (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning prizes (specifically 10) for each round game. The round game never ends before the prevention start period elapses.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4301, a negative determination is made in step S4302, or when the process of step S4303 is executed, a stop end period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the round game. It is determined whether or not (step S4304). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, a drive control process for stopping prevention is executed (step S4305). Thereby, the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged from the prevention position to the retracted position. The blocking end period is set to a period shorter than the blocking start period.

  Next, the relationship between the open / closed states of the special prize winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the flow-down prevention member 303 will be described. FIG. 89 is a time chart for explaining the relationship. 89A shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89B shows the period in which the first special electricity prize device 301 is open, and FIG. 89C shows the second special electricity prize device 302. FIG. 89 (d) shows a period in which the flow-down prevention member 303 is disposed at the blocking position. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open / closed states of the special prize winning devices 301 and 302 and the operation position of the flow-down prevention member 303. FIG. The case of the opening / closing execution mode in which a round game occurs three times will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the first round game is executed at the timing of t1. At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 89 (b) and FIG. 89 (c), the first special electricity prize device 301 and the second special electricity prize device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (d), the flow-off prevention member 303 is arranged from the retracted position to the blocking position at the timing t2 when the blocking start period has elapsed from the timing t1 when the first round game is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-in prevention member 303 is in the prevention position.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the first round game ends as shown in FIG. 89 (a). At the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the state where the flow-down prevention member 303 is disposed at the prevention position is maintained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), both the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are in the closed state, and the flow-in prevention member 303 is in the prevention position. As a result, a game ball that has passed in front of the first special electricity prize winning device 301 at a timing when the first special electricity prize winning device 301 is closed, or a game ball that has passed in front of the first special electricity prize winning device 301 in the interval period, flows down. Further downflow is prevented while resting on the upper surface of the blocking member 303.

  Thereafter, the next round game is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 89 (a), and the first special electric prize is received at the timing of t4 as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c). The device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-in prevention member 303 is in the prevention position.

  Thereafter, when the prevention end period elapses after the round game is started at the timing t5, the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged from the prevention position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 89 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is in the retracted position. Thereby, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the flow-down prevention member 303 start to flow downward, and all of the game balls win the second special electric prize winning device 302.

  Thereafter, the same operation as the timing from t2 to t5 is repeated at the timing from t6 to t9. Then, at the timing of t10, the last round game ends as shown in FIG. 89 (a). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special electricity prize winning device 301 and the second special electricity prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. Also, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the flow prevention member 303 is disposed at the retracted position.

  According to this embodiment described above in detail, even if a ball entry leak to the first special electric prize winning device 301 occurs, the inflow of the leaked game ball to the downstream side is blocked by the flow-down preventing member 303. Then, in a situation where the second special electric prize winning device 302 is in an open state, the blocking by the flow-in blocking member 303 is released, so that the game ball that has been blocked from flowing in downstream by the flow-in blocking member 303 is obtained. The player enters the second special electricity prize winning device 302. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball leakage to the special electricity prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the opening / closing execution mode.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the position at which the combination of the special prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided is different from that in the first embodiment. In addition to the through gate 35, there is a ball-in-part that is an opportunity to acquire the hold information on the normal side. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the special prize apparatus 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. In the present embodiment, the special prize apparatus 32 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. A combination with the through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the positional relationship between the left and right is reversed. In other words, the special prize winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at a midway position in the vertical direction of the left area PA2, and has a fourth discharge path portion 45 formed therein. 201 is provided in the left frame part 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 exists at the left end of the left area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is inclined downward toward the right. The game balls flowing down the left area PA2 reach the area where the special prize winning device 32 is provided, except for the game balls entering the entrance 36e of the warp passage.

  A guide nail group 241 is provided by arranging a plurality of nails 24b above the special prize winning device 32 in the left area PA2. The guide nail group 241 flows into the left area PA2 and guides the game balls that have not entered the entrance part 36e of the warp passage to the receiving part 231. As a result, the game ball that flows down the left area PA2 and reaches the special prize winning device 32 is first guided to the receiving portion 231 and then reaches the left end of the opening / closing member 202. When the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the fourth discharge passage portion 45 can be won by lowering the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 to the right. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, it flows down below the opening / closing member 202 through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening / closing member 202. Further, even when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate 214, the game ball flows down from the placed position to the lower side of the opening / closing member 202.

  In the left area PA2, a through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special prize winning device 32 and near the center frame 36a. Further, a regulation nail group 242 is provided between the special prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 for guiding the game ball that was present in the predetermined range on the right side of the guide plate 214 to the through gate 35. . Thereby, when the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is present in the predetermined range on the right side on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball wins the through gate 35. It becomes. Then, as a result of the winning to the through gate 35, as in the case of the first embodiment, the usual figure is reserved on the condition that the upper limit number of usual-side reserved information is not stored in the general-purpose reserved area 65c. Side hold information is acquired.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the through gate 35, a sudden gate 311 is provided as a ball entry part that is a trigger for obtaining the hold information on the normal side. The burst gate 311 is provided above the guide nail group 241 in the left area PA2. When a winning to the unexpected gate 311 occurs, as in the case where a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, the upper limit number of holding information on the map side is not stored in the holding map area 65c. As a condition, the hold information on the universal map side is acquired. The burst gate 311 has a penetrating gate penetrating in the vertical direction like the through gate 35, and the winning game ball continues to flow down the game area PA as it is, but is not limited to this. In other words, the game ball that has won the burst gate 311 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24.

  Here, a restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the burst gate 311 so as to make it difficult to win a prize to the burst gate 311. Since the restriction nail 312 is provided, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 wins the sudden gate 311 is the probability that the game ball supplied to the lower area PA4 wins the first operating port 33. The probability is lower than. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 wins the unexpected gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball flowing down below the special prize winning device 32 in the left area PA2 wins the general winning opening 31. It has become. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 wins the unexpected gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball wins the special electric prize device 32 when the special electric prize device 32 is in an open state. In addition, the probability is lower than the probability that a game ball wins the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 wins the burst gate 311 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins the second operation port 34 when the second operation port 34 is in the open state. The probability is low. For example, when 1000 game balls flow into the left area PA2, it is a probability that one game ball can win the abrupt gate 311.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when the hold information on the normal map side is acquired, the open state of the public power is surely generated by using the hold information on the normal map side. That is, when a winning to the through gate 35 or the unexpected gate 311 occurs and the hold information on the normal side is acquired, the second operation port 34 is surely opened thereafter. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage over the fact that the hold information on the normal side is acquired.

  As described above, the game balls flowing down the left area PA2 do not win the special prize apparatus 32 even if the left area PA2 is provided with the special prize device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311. Flows into the lower area PA4. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach a position where it can win a prize in the first operating port 33, and if the second operating port 34 is in an open state, the game ball is won in the second operating port 34. Possible positions can be reached. In addition, it is possible to reach a position where the general winning opening 31 can be won. Thus, by continuing the game ball launching operation so as to flow down the left area PA2, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the sudden use All the gates 311 can be targeted for winning.

  On the other hand, the right area PA3 is provided with the nail 24b, but is not provided with the ball entry portion. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right area PA3 flows into the lower area PA4, and the inflowed game ball can reach a position where it can win the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 is open. If it becomes, it can reach | attain the position which can win a prize to the said 2nd operating port 34. FIG. In this case, in relation to the fact that the right area PA3 is not provided with the entrance part as described above, the launch operation is performed so that the right area PA3 flows down rather than the launch operation so as to flow down the left area PA2. In the case of having performed, winning to the second working port 34 in the open state is more likely to occur. Thereby, for example, when a winning to the sudden gate 311 occurs and the open state of the second operation port 34 suddenly occurs, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3, thereby It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a prize for the two operation ports 34.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the hold information acquisition process on the normal side executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, the hold information acquisition process on the normal map side is executed in step S1101 in the general map normal power control process (FIG. 37).

  When a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred (step S4401: YES), and the number of reserved information on the map side stored in the map reserved area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES) ), 1 is added to the value of the general map reservation counter provided in the main RAM 65 so that the main CPU 63 can grasp the number of unprocessed general map storage information stored in the general map storage area 65c. (Step S4403). By the way, the display content of the general map hold display section 38b in the general map unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the general map hold counter. As a result, the display content of the general map hold display unit 38b corresponds to the number of hold information on the general map side stored in the general map hold area 65c. Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reservation area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

  After that, the usual hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4405). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the usual figure hold command, it transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for informing the number of the hold information on the map side stored in the map holding area 65c is performed, and the display control device 82 issues a command corresponding to the map holding command. By receiving the content, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of hold information on the normal map side. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern is started in the general map display unit 38a triggered by the general map side hold information, the content of the image display corresponds to the fact that the number of the general map side hold information has decreased by one. It will be updated to the contents.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. A first holding display area 313 for informing the number of first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 85 on the lower edge portion of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and a second special figure. A second hold display area 314 for informing the number of second hold information stored in the hold area 86 is set. In the first hold display area 313, the same number of unit display areas as the number of the first hold information that can be stored in the first special figure hold area 85 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and the number of the first hold information increases. The hold image 315 is displayed in order from the left unit display area, and the hold image 315 is deleted in order from the right unit display area as the number of first hold information decreases. In the second hold display area 314, the same number of unit display areas as the number of pieces of second hold information that can be stored in the second special figure hold area 86 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction. The hold image 315 is displayed in order from the left unit display area as it increases, and the hold image 315 is deleted in order from the right unit display area as the number of second hold information decreases. By setting the first hold display area 313, the number of the first hold information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the symbol display device 41, and the second hold display area 314 is set. Thus, the number of the second hold information can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41.

  On the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a universal figure holding display area 316 for informing the number of holding information on the normal figure side stored in the universal figure holding area 65c is set at the upper left corner. Yes. In the general map hold display area 316, the same number of unit display areas as the number of hold information on the general map side that can be stored in the general map hold area 65c are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction. The hold image 315 is displayed in order from the left unit display area as it increases, and the hold image 315 is deleted in order from the right unit display area as the number of hold information on the normal map side decreases. By setting the common figure hold display area 316, the number of hold information on the common figure side can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, the display control apparatus 82 increases the number of the hold images 315 displayed in the general map hold display area 316 when the command corresponding to the general map hold command is received. Further, the display control device 82 transmits from the voice light emission control device 81 based on the fact that a command indicating that the variable display of the picture on the normal map display unit 38a has started is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the voice light emission control device 81. When the command to be received is received, the number of reserved images 315 displayed in the general-purpose hold display area 316 is decreased by one.

  Returning to the explanation of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) on the normal map side, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, a negative determination is made in step S4402, or if the process of step S4405 is executed, On the condition that the winning gate 311 has been won (step S4406: YES), and the number of reserved information on the map side stored in the map reserved area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number ( Step S4407: YES), 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose hold counter in the main RAM 65 (Step S4408). As already described, the display content of the general map hold display section 38b in the general map unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the general map hold counter. Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reserved area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

  Thereafter, when the current state is the opening / closing execution mode (step S4410: YES), or when the value of the general-purpose hold counter in the main RAM 65 is 2 or more although it is not the open / close execution mode, When two or more pieces of hold information on the side are stored (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), a general-use hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4412). In this case, the processing contents of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are the same as those in the case where the ordinary map hold command is transmitted in step S4405.

  On the other hand, if the current state is not the opening / closing execution mode (step S4410: NO) and the value of the general-purpose hold counter in the main RAM 65 is “1”, that is, the general-purpose hold information is 1 in the general-purpose hold area 65c. If only one is stored (step S4411: YES), a sudden hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4413). When receiving the sudden hold command, the voice light emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, the display control device 82 updates the display content of the general hold display area 316 in the same manner as when a command corresponding to the general hold command is received. Further, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the sudden command, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 93 (b), as a special notification, the display control device 82 wins the second operating port 34 on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. A special notification image 317 that prompts the user to perform a launching operation is displayed. By displaying the special notification image 317, the player performs a launch operation aimed at winning a prize to the second operation port 34, and it is possible to generate an opportunity to acquire the second hold information.

  When it is time to display the special notification image 317 in a situation in which the game display effect is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 82 is displayed at the upper right corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reduced display area 318 is set, and the game display effect is continuously reduced in the reduced display area 318. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in a predetermined size even when a sudden hold command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize the notification image 317.

  Next, how the hold information on the normal map side is acquired will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 94 (a) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 94 (b) shows the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. The timing is shown, FIG. 94 (d) shows the occurrence timing of the winning to the unexpected gate 311, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (d), a winning for the sudden gate 311 occurs at the timing t1 when the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. As a result, the hold information on the normal side is acquired at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 94 (e). The second operation port 34 is in the open state triggered by the acquired hold information on the normal map side, and the second hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 34 in the open state is the game time. As shown in FIG. 94A, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is executed from the timing t2 to the timing t9 as shown in FIG. . Here, in the present embodiment, when the second small hit result is obtained, the number of times of opening the special prize winning device 32 is set to two.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special prize winning device 32 is in the open state over the timings t3 to t4 and the timings t6 to t7. In this case, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 at each of the timing t4 and the timing t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), a winning to the through gate 35 occurs at each of the timing t5 and the timing t8, and as shown in FIG. 94 (e) at each of the timing t5 and the timing t8. The hold information on the normal side is acquired at. As a result, an opportunity that the second working port 34 is opened again occurs again, and a winning for the second working port 34 that is opened is generated and the second hold information is acquired. As shown in (a), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered again from the timing of t10 to the timing of t16, triggered by the second small hitting result.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special prize winning device 32 is in the open state over the timings t11 to t12 and the timings t13 to t14. Further, at the timing of t14, the opening / closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), a winning to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t15, and the hold information on the normal side is acquired as shown in FIG. 94 (e) at the timing of t15. Thereby, the opportunity for the second operating port 34 to be in the open state again occurs, a winning is generated for the second operating port 34 in the open state, and the second hold information is acquired, so that the opening / closing execution mode is obtained. Occurs.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

  Even in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, when the game ball enters the gate 311 for sudden occurrence, the hold information on the normal side can be acquired, and the second operation port 34 can be opened. Then, when the game ball enters the second operating port 34 that has been opened, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, not only in the opening / closing execution mode but also in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to cause a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation port 34.

  A restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 so that the probability of entering the game ball into the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of entering the game ball into the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. ing. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the opening / closing execution mode will occur based on the entrance of the game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation other than the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the sudden start gate 311 in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the limit nail 312 is provided so that the probability of the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of the game ball entering the first operation port 33. From this point as well, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the unexpected gate 311 in a situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  When a game ball enters the sudden gate 311 and the hold information on the normal side is acquired and the second operation port 34 is opened, a special notification image 317 corresponding thereto is displayed on the symbol display device. 41. As a result, although the game ball has entered the sudden gate 311 and the second operation port 34 is opened, the game ball enters the second operation port 34 without noticing it. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate an event that the ball opportunity disappears.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, so that the player is more likely to be aware that the second operation port 34 is open. In a situation where there is no game ball entering the through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player is less aware that the second operating port 34 is open. In this case, since the special notification image 317 is displayed when the game ball enters the gate 311 for sudden occurrence and the hold information on the normal side is acquired in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, It becomes possible to make a player's consciousness turn to the operating port 34 being opened. In addition, the special notification image 317 is not displayed in the opening / closing execution mode in which the player is likely to be aware that the second operation port 34 is in the open state, so that the special notification image 317 is displayed. Can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player.

  A special notification image 317 is displayed when the hold information on the map side is acquired based on the game ball entering the gate 311 for sudden occurrence in a situation where the hold information on the map side is not acquired. Thus, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a situation where the player is less aware of the second operating port 34 being in the open state.

  A special electric prize device 32, a through gate 35, and an unexpected gate 311 are provided in an area where a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 or a game ball flowing down can enter. Thereby, it becomes possible to aim at winning to the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the unexpected gate 311 by the same mode of the launch operation.

  The game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is more likely to reach the position of the second operating port 34 than the game ball flowing down the left area PA2. As a result, when the second operation port 34 is in an open state in a state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3, so that the game to the second operation port 34 is performed. It becomes possible to make it easy for balls to enter.

<Another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the unexpected gate 311 may be set in a positional relationship in which one winning is not aimed at the other winning. For example, a combination of the special prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2 and a sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right area PA3. May be provided in the right area PA3, and the burst gate 311 may be provided in the left area PA2.

  ・ When the power transmission open lottery process is executed for the hold information on the normal map side in the same way as in the first embodiment and the power distribution open state is selected, the power transmission open state is entered and the second operation port 34 is opened. It is good also as composition which will be in a state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the sudden gate 311, a situation may occur in which the second operation port 34 is not opened. In this configuration, the holding information on the normal side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the holding information on the normal side acquired based on the game ball entering the unexpected gate 311; It is good also as a structure from which the probability that it will be elected in a public power open state is different in the public power open lottery processing by the former general information side hold information and the latter general information side hold information.

  For example, the hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is more common than the hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It is good also as a structure which is easy to become a normal power open state win by an electric open lottery process. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the game ball having entered the sudden gate 311.

  On the other hand, the hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is more than the hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It is good also as a structure which is hard to become a public power open state win by a public power open lottery process. In this case, since the probability of entering into the open-circuit state is reduced with respect to the game ball entering the sudden gate 311, it is not necessary to reduce the probability of the game ball entering the sudden gate 311.

  ・ The hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general map side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 are separated. In addition to handling separately, one of the hold information is not subjected to the public power open lottery process, and the second operation port 34 is in the general electric open state, and the other is in the general electric open lottery process. Thus, the second working port 34 may be configured to be in a state where the normal power is opened. For example, with respect to the hold information on the normal map side acquired based on the game ball having entered the gate 311 for sudden breakout, the second operation port 34 is in the open state of the normal power without executing the general power release lottery process. As for the holding information on the side of the normal map acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 is opened by the public power open lottery process. It is good also as composition which will be in a state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the game ball having entered the sudden gate 311.

  The probability of entering the sudden gate 311 is the probability of entering the general winning opening 31, the entering probability of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state, the entering probability of the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 Is not limited to a configuration lower than the probability of entering the ball and the probability of entering the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. It is good. In addition, the spouting gate 311 may be configured to have a higher probability of entering than the first operation port 33.

  A configuration may be adopted in which a second working port for sudden breakout is provided instead of the sudden gate 311. In this case, by not providing an opening / closing member for preventing or allowing a game ball from entering the second working port for sudden breakout, the game for the second working port for sudden breakout is provided. The configuration is such that the probability of the ball entering does not change according to the gaming state, and when a game ball enters the second operation port for sudden occurrence, the same as when a game ball enters the second operation port 34 The second hold information is acquired. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode suddenly occurs when a game ball enters the sudden second working port.

  In addition, the average variation display period of the game times triggered by the second holding information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the sudden second operation port in the configuration is the game ball in the second operation port 34. It is good also as a structure shorter than the average fluctuation display period of game times triggered by the 2nd hold information acquired based on having entered. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the opening / closing execution mode to be started after the game ball enters the sudden second operation port.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special prize winning device 32, a special prize winning device 321 is provided. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3 of the game area PA, a special prize winning device 321 is provided in place of the special prize winning device 32. The special prize winning device 321 is provided across the entire horizontal direction at a midway position in the vertical direction of the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 surely passes through the area where the special prize winning device 321 is provided. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided at a position near the variable display unit 36 below the special prize winning device 321 in the right area PA3.

  The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b). 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a big prize opening 322 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the special winning opening 322 is formed is a position near the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3. A special electric prize device 321 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the big prize opening 322. The special electric prize winning device 321 is provided with a guide plate 323 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the special winning opening 322. The guide plate 323 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving means (not shown). It moves between the position where the pachinko machine 10 slides forward from the blocking position and the guidance position where the amount of projection from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

  In the game board 24, a ball receiving portion 324 is provided at a position above the right end of the guide plate 323, and in the right area PA3, the game that has flowed from the upper area PA1 into the right area PA3 above the special prize apparatus 321. A guide nail group 241 for guiding all of the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 is provided (see FIG. 95). The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. All the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the ball receiver 324 by the guide nail group 241. The distance between the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Become. In this blocking position, the front end portion of the guide plate 323 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end portion of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in a state where the guide plate 323 is located at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 below the ball receiving portion 324. Will fall. Further, the projecting dimension of the guide plate 323 arranged at the blocking position forward from the board surface of the game board 24 is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving portion 324 and moves toward the guide plate 323 arranged at the blocking position, the guide plate 323 and the window are not placed on the guide plate 323. It falls below the guide plate 323 through the space between the panels 52. Due to the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening 322 is blocked. Further, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position close to the variable display unit 36, and the position is located on the left side with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 so that the game ball bounced at the ball receiving portion 324 is difficult to reach. The positions are separated. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is disposed at the blocking position, the winning to the through gate 35 is also blocked.

  When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Become. In this guiding position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in a state where the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position is located on the upper surface of the region protruding on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the guide plate 323. It will be listed.

  Two partition walls 326 and 327 are arranged at intermediate positions in the horizontal direction on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 that projects to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guidance position. Is provided. The first partition wall 326 present on the right side of the partition walls 326 and 327 extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position. In this situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 and the board surface of the game board 24 are separated by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 present on the left side extends from the surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position. However, the front end portion of the second partition wall 327 exists on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball than the front end portion of the guide plate 323. Thus, in the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed, the upper surface of the protruding region 325 is inclined downward toward the left as a whole. Further, on the upper surface of the projecting region 325, the slope is descending toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the left side of the ball receiving portion 324 and the position of the first partition wall 326. Up to the position of the partition wall 327 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the big prize opening 322 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the upper surface of the projecting area 325 has the first partition wall 326 and the game board while the game ball placed on the upper surface of the projecting area 325 flows down to the left in the situation where the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guiding position. It is inclined so as to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction so as to pass through the space between the 24 board surfaces and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323.

  In the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball, so the guide plate 323 is at the guide position. The window panel 52 prevents the game ball placed on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 from dropping from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323 in the disposed state. The left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36, and the distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball. Is less than Therefore, in the situation where the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding region 325 may fall from the left end portion of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323. Blocked by the frame 36a.

  Due to the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position, the game ball flows down the protruding region 325 by its own weight along the meandering path on the protruding region 325, so that the game ball wins a big prize. A ball is entered into the mouth 322. The game ball that has won the big prize opening 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the big prize opening 322. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize at the special winning opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result that is the target of opening the grand prize opening 322, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the main prize opening 322, Subtract 1 from the value of the winning counter in the side RAM 65. When the value of the winning counter is “0”, it is determined that winnings corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings have occurred as in the first embodiment, and an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small hit result is set. Terminate.

  When a game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 disposed at the guide position and the game ball is placed in the big winning opening 322, the guide plate 323 is placed with the game ball placed. Move from the guiding position to the blocking position. In this case, the game ball placed on the guide plate 323 moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and hits the board surface of the game board 24 from the front. The further rearward movement is prevented in contact with each other, so that the guide plate 323 does not receive from the lower side and falls downward.

  As already described, the through gate 35 is provided below the special prize winning device 321, and the position of the through gate 35 is the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 in the positional relationship in the lateral direction. It is the same position as the area between. Further, between the special prize winning device 321 and the through gate 35, a game ball placed on the inter-compartment region Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 is allowed to the guide plate 323. A regulation nail group 242 for guiding the falling game ball toward the through gate 35 is provided so that the through gate 35 is won in the event of falling with the movement from the position to the blocking position (see FIG. 95). . Thereby, when the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in a situation where the game ball is placed in the inter-compartment area Y, a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-compartment region Y is spaced to the left with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, a dimension larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving portion 324 is prevented from winning the through gate 35 in a situation where the guide plate 323 is disposed at the blocking position.

  A game ball won in the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a prize to the through gate 35 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the through gate 35, the general-purpose random number counter is provided on the condition that the upper-limit number of holding information on the usual figure side is not stored in the ordinary figure holding area 65c. The numerical information of C4 is stored in the general map hold area 65c as the general map hold information.

  Here, when the game ball is being fired in the shortest firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds) by the same launch mode in which the game ball will flow down the right area PA3, the guide plate 323 is guided to the guidance position. In order to increase the possibility that a game ball of the next firing order is present in the inter-compartment region Y with respect to the game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening 322 in the situation where The position of is set. As a result, in the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guide position, when the game ball of the upper limit number of winning balls is entered in the large winning opening 322, it is placed on the guide plate 323. It becomes easy for the game ball to win the through gate 35.

  In addition, a meandering passage that not only extends in the lateral direction but also meanders in the front-rear direction is formed in the projecting region 325 of the guide plate 323. Is set. Accordingly, it is possible to set the inter-compartment region Y that makes it easy to generate a prize for the through gate 35 while suppressing an increase in the lateral dimension of the guide plate 323.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special electricity prize device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special electricity prize device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment are both provided, and the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode It is good also as a structure by which the kind of special electric prize apparatus 32 and 321 used as the execution object of opening / closing control is changed according to the kind of game result which became. In this case, when the special electricity prize winning device 321 according to the nineteenth embodiment becomes the execution target of the opening / closing control, the special electricity prize winning device 32 according to the first embodiment becomes the execution subject of the opening / closing control to the through gate 35. Therefore, the player expects that the special electricity prize winning device 321 according to the nineteenth embodiment is an execution target of the opening / closing control.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored as history information (or pitching history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information. It is good also as composition which becomes. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a, the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the result of entering the same type of entrance part is the same type of entrance part. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of the ball detection sensors are present and a plurality of the ball detection sensors are present in accordance therewith. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (3) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can communicate with each other and can be handled by the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be employed in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (6) In the first embodiment, etc., information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute the notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are obtained using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41. It is good also as a structure which performs corresponding alerting | reporting.

  (7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA was normal on the previous business day at the start of the game hall.

  (8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start a game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It is good. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success-and-failure determination processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasure switch turned ON, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode of the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

  (9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. Also, the configuration may be such that neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (10) The management IC 66 is not provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing a history information storing process and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. A configuration provided in the CPU 92 or a configuration provided in the sound emission control device 81 may be employed. When the payout-side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

  (11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to output history information or information of various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

  (12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device. The terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. 116, 117, or 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and store information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply is stopped, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and held, and the game ball is played by any one of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (15) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to a configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred is stored as history information. The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality It is good also as a structure by which it is memorize | stored as historical information that this occurred. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to opening / closing execution mode is calculated by using the above history information, and it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to high frequency support mode is calculated, and predetermined | prescribed abnormality is The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

  (17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of balls entered for the game balls entering the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and History information including RTC information may be stored for awarding of a prize ball of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and entering a privilege triggering ball portion that triggers the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (19) It is good also as a structure in which things other than the thing in said each embodiment are contained as object kept as log | history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (20) In the first embodiment and the like, a configuration in which the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (21) The number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball-entry part that is generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of balls that have been grasped using the history information. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entry portion in a state where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball-entry part generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In some cases, abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and causing a game ball to enter a predetermined entrance part.

  (22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (23) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reverse to that of the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process for changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (24) When information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of a program and data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program It is good also as a structure which can output only to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

  (25) Other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs May be configured to store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

  (26) The detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by grasping the total number of game balls detected in this way is not limited to this. For example, all of the game balls discharged from the game area PA It is good also as a structure which provides the discharge | emission detection sensor which detects the game ball which passes the said channel | path area | region while providing the channel | path area | region where one game ball will pass one by one. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls received in each of the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each of the entrance parts to the total number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA.

  (27) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32, but an operating port is provided as a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the special figure side. Also good. For example, there is an operating port that is not equipped with a general electric utility 34a and is not provided with a member that directly prevents or allows the entry of a game ball, and is an opportunity to acquire second hold information. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode, an opportunity to acquire the second hold information occurs. In addition, in the configuration, when the second hold information is a target of the determination of the success / failure, the configuration is such that the opening / closing execution mode is surely generated, so that when the game ball enters the operation port in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the open / close execution mode is surely generated. This increases the importance of the game ball entering the operating port in the opening / closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (28) In the first embodiment, by providing a through gate 35 on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32, it is possible to enter a game ball into the through gate 35 when the special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. However, the configuration for providing a ball entry portion that allows a game ball to enter in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric opening / closing member of the special electric prize winning device 32 is configured as a general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34, and this special electric opening / closing member is arranged from the closed position to the open position, thereby allowing one of the special electric opening / closing members. The structure is such that a game ball can enter a predetermined entrance part by pressing the entrance opening / closing member of the predetermined entrance part and the entrance opening / closing member moving from the closed position to the open position. Also good. In this case, when the special electric opening / closing member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressing of the ball opening / closing member by the special electric opening / closing member is released, and the incoming ball opening / closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. . Even with this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (29) The game ball can reach the game ball at a position where the game ball can be reached even when the special electricity prize device 32 is not opened or closed, and when the launch operation is performed with the special electricity prize device 32 being aimed. A through gate 35 may be provided at a position, and an electric opening / closing member that prevents or allows a game ball from entering the through gate 35 may be provided. When the opening / closing execution mode is started, the electric opening / closing member prevents the game ball from entering the through gate 35 and the game ball enters the through gate 35 at regular intervals. It is set as the structure which moves between permissible positions which accept | permit. Even with this configuration, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (30) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the normal side is acquired, the general power open state of the second operating port 34 is surely generated. It is good. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (31) In the first embodiment, when the special prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special ball winning device 32 may be configured such that a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the special prize winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state. That is, in this configuration, even when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the special ball winning device 32 is not allowed to win, but the game ball can be placed on the guidance plate portion 214, and the guidance plate portion 214. When the special ball prize device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a situation where the game ball is placed on the game ball, the game ball can fall toward the through gate 35. In this case, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 in a situation where the special electric prize device 32 is in a closed state, and even if the special electric prize device 32 is in a closed state, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (32) When the special prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35, and the special prize winning device 32 is in the closed state from the open state. It is good also as a structure in which the game ball which was mounted on the guide plate part 214 can enter the through gate 35 when switching to. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to each of the start timing and end timing of the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32. In addition, it is possible to generate many opportunities for game balls to enter the through gate 35. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (33) In the first embodiment, when the special electricity prize device 32 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is reliably prevented from flowing downstream from the special electricity prize device 32. It is good. For example, when the opening / closing member 202 has a plate shape that does not have the opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening / closing member 202 is a game board when disposed in the closed position. In the case where the game board 24 is in a state of being sunk rearward from the board surface 24 and is disposed at the open position, the opening / closing member 202 may be provided between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. Thus, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the special prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the special prize winning device 32 flows down the right area PA3. The game ball to be won will surely win the special electric prize winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (34) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and is in the open state, the second operating port 34 is opened by electric drive. For example, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the game ball that has entered the through gate 35. A configuration in which one or two game balls enter the second operation port 34 and mechanically interlocked using the pressing force of the game ball so that the second operation port 34 returns to the closed state. It is good. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (35) In the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 continues to flow down the game area PA, but the present invention is not limited to this. The played game balls may be discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (36) While applying the configuration of the special prize winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the configuration of the special prize winning devices 261 and 262 of the fifteenth embodiment to the second working port 34, the second working port A predetermined entrance portion may be provided at a position where entry is possible only when 34 is opened and closed. In this case, the predetermined entrance part may be an entrance part in which the payout of the game ball is executed by the entrance of the game ball. It is good also as a pitching part from which information is acquired.

  (37) In the opening / closing execution mode, it may be configured such that the hold information on the normal side is not digested. As a result, since the transition to the normal power open state of the second operating port 34 in response to the acquisition of the hold information on the normal map side in the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends, It is possible to cause the player to aim at entering the game ball into the second operation port 34. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (38) Even in the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information on the normal map side is digested, but the variable display of the pattern in the general figure display section 38a started in the opening / closing execution mode is continued until the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is good also as a structure. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the player to aim at entering the game ball into the second operation port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (39) When the second hold information is a target of the success / failure determination process, it may be configured not only to the big hit result and the small hit result, but also to be a losing result. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can be a small hit result even if it is a case where 1st pending | holding information becomes the object of a success / failure determination process.

  (40) It may be configured such that a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the utility model 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared to the game area PA in a situation where the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner, the utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the open call using the open call lottery using the normal call random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. Yes. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration time for the display unit 38a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  (41) When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in an open state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special electricity prize winning device 32, and when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in a closed state, the game ball to the special electricity prize winning device 32 It is not limited to the configuration in which the player can not enter the game, and even if the special electricity prize device 32 is in the closed state, the game ball can be entered into the special electricity prize device 32, but it is in the open state. It may be configured that it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special electricity prize winning device 32 than in the case. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (42) When the second operation port 34 is in an open state, a game ball can enter the second operation port 34, and when the second operation port 34 is in a closed state, the second operation port 34 is provided. It is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball cannot enter the game ball, and even when the second operation port 34 is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second operation port 34. It may be configured that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second operation port 34 than in the case of an open state. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (43) The player cannot refill the pachinko machine 10 with game balls, and the game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls that can be used by the player is stored and held. The configuration of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which a game ball can be launched within the range of information on the number of usable game balls stored and held.

  (44) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, a result of a lottery process of a combination executed when starting one game based on an operation of a start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special control state is calculated using information, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special control state to the total number of games that have been digested may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the fifteenth configuration may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form with arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1st-19th embodiment with the predetermined combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined entry means, specific storage execution means (execution detection processing in the main CPU 63) is performed so that information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means (main RAM 65). Function)
A privilege for executing a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means A granting unit (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Is executed in the main RAM 65), and predetermined information (first information) that enables the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry into the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. In the eighth and twelfth embodiments, the predetermined storage execution means (first information is stored in the predetermined storage means). In the ninth to eleventh and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S3202, S3205, and S3208 in the main CPU 63 are used. Step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player Is done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of balls entered or the frequency of the ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by the predetermined information not triggering the execution of the process for granting a privilege to the player It is possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured such that, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Feature A4. All the entry means for discharging the entered game balls from the game area, including the predetermined entry means, are stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of the game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball entry means.

  According to the feature A4, since all the entry means for discharging the game ball from the game area are managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, the entry frequency for any entry means Can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A5, since the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined entry means is included in the predetermined information, the use of the predetermined information allows the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. It becomes possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A6, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

  Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for allowing the predetermined storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (first operation). In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the management side The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3103 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, comprising external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and analyze the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entry means using the read information.

Feature A9. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The game machine according to Feature A8, wherein the external output means outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the game machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature A10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (mainly) The gaming machine according to Feature A9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used to output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to the outside, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, the processing load of the first control unit is extremely increased because the second control unit provided separately from the first control unit having the specific storage execution unit has the predetermined storage execution unit. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while avoiding this.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature A13. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured to cause the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific ball entry means, so that the game to the specific ball entry means is executed. Specific information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the ninth to the ninth information) that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine. In the eleventh embodiment, numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific entry means (the first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
A gaming machine according to Feature A11 or A12, wherein

  According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Further, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature A14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature A15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined pitching means and the second information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The gaming machine according to Feature A13 or A14, comprising identification information transmitting means for transmitting (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control unit. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to feature A16, when supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature A17. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to A15 or A16, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, and thus a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific entry means. Any one of features A15 to A17, comprising: means for storing correspondence relation information to be stored in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116) (function for executing correspondence relation setting processing in the management side CPU 112) The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature A20. The second control means has a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, more than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to feature A20, since the second control means is provided with more receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the receiving unit. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature A21. First external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined entry means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
Second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that the specific entry means corresponds to the device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entering the specific ball entry means It is possible to specify the entrance mode. In addition, when the external output is performed, information on a combination of the predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means is output to the outside, and the specific information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that is being performed is output to the outside. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify each entrance mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A22. Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, and third) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management CPU 112. In the third embodiment, the processing of step S2308, step S2313, and step S2317 in the management CPU 112 is executed. Function, a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S2905, The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, characterized in that the facilities embodiment has a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A22, the aspect information corresponding to the entry state of the game ball is calculated by the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (the first storage means) In the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a management side in the ninth embodiment A function of executing the process of step S3103 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, second) for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation. In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S2308 in the management side CPU 112, A function for executing the processes of step S2313 and step S2317, a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment; In the seventh embodiment, step S2905 in the management CPU 112 is performed. Ability to run the process, the gaming machine according to the features A22 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A24. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth implementations) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means The feature A22 or A23 includes the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted, and thus it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature A25. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. Or the gaming machine according to A23.

  According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and the game ball enters When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the aspect information.

  Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

  According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature A27. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

  According to feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time an operation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

  According to the feature A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature A29. Features A22 to A28, characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature A30. The gaming machine according to Feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to A30.

  According to the feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (step S2310, step S2314 and step S2318 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A32, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the entrance mode of a game ball, it becomes possible to read several mode information collectively.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means includes
Means for determining whether or not the mode information is storage target information (function for executing the processing of step S2503 in the management CPU 112);
Means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature A32, further comprising:

  According to the feature A33, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature A34. The game according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature A34, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Any one of the features A22 to A34, Game machines.

  According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature A36. Provided with notification control means (function to execute the processing of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, wherein:

  According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entrance mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature A38. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature A39. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

  Feature A40. Features A1 to A1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (function of executing step S218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

  According to the feature A40, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the number and frequency of game balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the ball means.

  Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature A41, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 In step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220, and step S3223 are executed. To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments) that uses the predetermined information to calculate aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 performs the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 performs the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317, and the fourth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the process of step S2905 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Function, in the eleventh embodiment, the main side CP Processing in step S3503 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments). The function of executing steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the process of step S3103 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to be executed)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management side CPU 112 In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management in the seventh embodiment. The process of step S2905 in the side CPU 112 is executed Function, the gaming machine according to the features B1 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature B3. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth implementations) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means The feature B1 or B2 has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased and the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature B4. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained B1 Or the gaming machine described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature B5. The information calculation means calculates the mode information when supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or supply of operating power to the control means is started. Thru | or the game machine of any one of B4.

  According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature B6. Any of the characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

  According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature B8. Features B1 to B7, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to B9.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (step S2310, step S2314 and step S2318 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, further including a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B11, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature B12. The result storage executing means includes means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine of feature B11, characterized by

  According to the feature B12, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature B13. The game according to Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation unit calculates the mode information when the second control unit receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit, according to any one of the features B1 to B13, Game machines.

  According to the feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature B15. Provided with notification control means (function to execute the processing of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein:

  According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature B17. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to Feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B17, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature B18. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification unit is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature B18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined memory means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The processing of step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220 and step S3223 in the main CPU 63 is executed. To function),
Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, and third) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management CPU 112. In the third embodiment, the processing of step S2308, step S2313, and step S2317 in the management CPU 112 is executed. Function, a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S2905, And functions) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature B20, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Program output means for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102) (function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the special information can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature C2. Selection means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to Feature C1, further comprising:

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the special information is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. Is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature C3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is specified.

  According to the feature C3, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature C4. Any one of features C1 to C3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to collect signal paths for the information output unit in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first control unit (main CPU 63) and a second control unit (management CPU 112);
The first control means includes
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) so that a privilege is granted to the player when a predetermined event occurs,
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when it occurs;
With
When the second control unit receives the predetermined event information, the second control unit stores information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth In the embodiment, the information is executed by the main RAM 65) so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (first to eighth). Predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth) for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means. In the 11th to 12th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, and in the 10th embodiment, the steps S3202, S3205, and S3 in the main CPU 63 are performed. 08, step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature D1, when a predetermined event occurs, a privilege is given to the player. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means so that the processing load of the first control means does not increase excessively. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described above.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature D2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature D3. The predetermined storage execution unit executes the storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event in the predetermined storage unit, so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the specific event is determined outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function to output any one of first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature D4. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature D3, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature D5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. A gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a transmitting means (function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature D5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit. It is not necessary to store the correspondence relationship of these information in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to claim D5, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature D6, when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started, identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, so that a predetermined event and a specific event may occur. In the situation, it becomes possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means.

  Feature D7. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to D5 or D6, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature D8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event As described in any one of the features D5 to D7, characterized in that a means (a function for executing the correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112) is stored in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the type of event is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature D9. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. D5 A gaming machine according to any one of D8.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
With
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmission means (main side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  In addition, since the first information corresponds to the first event and the identification information indicating that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information This need not be stored in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature E2, the identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit when the supply of the operating power to the first control unit is started. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature E3. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to E1 or E2, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature E4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. One of the characteristics E1 to E3 is characterized by comprising means (function for executing the correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature E5. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of E4 to E4.

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature E6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is greater than The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature E6, since there are provided more signal paths than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with the configuration without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball is difficult to enter The variable pitching means provided so as to be switchable to each of the second states (the special electric prize device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric prize device 261 and the second in the fifteenth embodiment). Special prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing the special control for setting the variable pitching means to the second state after the first state (the special-side open setting process and the special electric close setting process in the main CPU 63 are executed) Function)
Transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing a special figure determining process in the main CPU 63);
Special ball entry means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth implementations) that allow game balls to enter in a predetermined game state that is not in the special control state, and allow game balls to enter in the special control state. In the form, the through gate 35, in the fourteenth embodiment, the first special entrance port 251 and the second special entrance port 252, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can be easily or easily entered into the variable ball entry means. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special control state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F2, even if the game state shifts to the special control state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition will be established in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state It becomes.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is established based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F3, when a special control state occurs, a game ball can enter the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state can occur again. . As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which special control states occur continuously, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F4. The transition means is a means for generating the special control state irrespective of the game ball entering the special ball entry means (the result of executing the success / failure determination process in step S1405 for the first hold information in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to F3, wherein the game machine has a function of shifting to an open / close execution mode.

  According to the feature F4, the special control state can be generated even when the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means. And, it has the configuration of the above feature F3, and when a special control state occurs, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state is achieved. It can occur again. In this case, the player expects the special control state to start in a situation that is not in the special control state, and expects the special control state to be continuously executed in the special control state. .

Feature F5. A predetermined entry means (first operation port 33) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
At least one necessary for generating the special control state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means even if the game ball has not entered the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature F3 or F4, wherein the condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature F5, in a predetermined game state that is not in the special control state, the special control state can occur based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. And, it has the configuration of the above feature F3, and when a special control state occurs, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state is achieved. It can occur again. In this case, the player expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means in a predetermined game state that is not in the special control state, and in the special control state, not only the variable ball entry means but also the special ball entry. The player expects a game ball to enter the means.

  Feature F6. The probability of occurrence of the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the special entry means is higher than the probability of occurrence of the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the gaming machine is higher.

  According to feature F6, the game ball is placed in the special ball entry means in the special control state, rather than the probability that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined game state that is not in the special control state and the special control state occurs. The probability that a special control state will occur continuously after entering the ball is higher. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball entering the special ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature F7. Means for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means (in the first to fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing step S1101 in the main CPU 63, in the eighteenth embodiment A function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63),
When the special opportunity information is acquired, at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein an expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not vary depending on the gaming state.

  According to the feature F7, the expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not vary according to the gaming state, and thus the expected value varies according to the gaming state. Compared to the above, the processing configuration can be simplified and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it is difficult to give inflection to the game. On the other hand, since the structure of the feature F1 is provided and the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the opportunity to acquire the special opportunity information is given. As a result, it is possible to give an inflection to the game.

Feature F8. The special entry means includes an opportunity entry means (second operation port 34) that enables entry of a game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the special entry means,
8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that an opportunity to shift to the special control state is generated based on the gaming ball entering the opportunity ball entry means.

  According to feature F8, a game ball can enter the opportunity entry means by entering the game ball into the special entry means, and a special control state can be obtained by entering the game ball into the opportunity entry means. An opportunity to move to. Thereby, in order to continuously generate the special control state, it is necessary to cause the special ball entry means to enter the game ball and the opportunity ball means to enter the game ball in the special control state. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of continuous occurrence of the special control state increases, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F9. The feature F8 is characterized in that the variable pitching means, the special pitching means, and the trigger pitching means are provided in an area where a game ball flows down when a launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F9, by continuing the launch operation according to a predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game to the opportunity ball entry means It becomes possible to aim at the entrance of the ball.

Feature F10. Means (main-side CPU 63) for controlling the entrance ball means to enter a state in which the game ball can enter, at least one condition that the game ball has entered the special entrance means. In step S1108 to step S1110).
The feature F8 or F9 is characterized in that, with respect to a game ball entering the special ball entry means, the frequency at which the opportunity ball entry means enters the ball ready state is constant regardless of the game state. Game machines.

  According to the feature F10, the frequency at which the initiating ball entry unit is ready to enter the game ball entering the special entry unit is constant regardless of the game state. The expected value at which a special control state will occur after the ball has entered does not vary depending on the gaming state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it is difficult to give inflection to the game. On the other hand, since the structure of the feature F1 is provided and the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. An inflection can be given, and as a result, a game can be given an inflection.

Feature F11. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R high-accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 16R high-accuracy result),
The game according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. Machine.

  According to the feature F11, since the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means. A player who expects a special control state is expected to generate a special control state in which a game ball easily enters the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F12. When the variable pitching means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special pitching means,
The gaming machine according to F11, wherein the number of times that the special control is executed is different between the first special control state and the second special control state.

  According to the feature F12, when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, the number of times of switching of the state in the variable pitching means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, and the game ball is expected to enter the special ball entry means. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which a game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. When the variable pitching means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special pitching means,
The gaming machine is
Means for executing a round game in which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times in the special control state (a function of executing a special electricity start process, a special electricity release process and a special electricity release process in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the round game when the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in one round game reaches a predetermined number (function of making an affirmative determination in step S3703 in the main CPU 63);
A means for executing the special control a plurality of times in a predetermined round game (a function of executing the process of step S3707 when the round counter = 1 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, comprising:

  According to the feature F13, when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, in the predetermined round game, the state change in the variable pitching means occurs a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to generate a predetermined round game that facilitates the entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means as a round game. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F14. As the execution mode of the special control, at least a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable entrance means is relatively high and low are set,
The multi-time execution means is configured to execute the special control that becomes the high expectation aspect after the special control that becomes the low expectation aspect is executed in the predetermined round game. The gaming machine according to Feature F13.

  According to the feature F14, in the predetermined round game, the special control in the high expectation mode is executed after the special control in the low expectation mode is executed. It is possible to allow a plurality of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game, while ensuring that the switching occurs multiple times.

  Feature F15. In the feature F14, the high expectation aspect is an aspect in which an upper limit period during which the variable pitching means is in the first state is a period equal to or longer than a product of a game ball firing period and the predetermined number. The gaming machine described.

  According to feature F15, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the state change in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game. It becomes possible to obtain.

  Feature F16. When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is configured to allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

  According to the feature F16, when the variable pitching means is switched from one to the other of the first state and the second state, the game ball can enter the special pitching means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  Feature F17. The special ball entry means is downstream of the variable ball entry means in the flow direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where a gaming ball can flow in at the timing of switching to.

  According to the feature F17, the special pitching means is provided at a position where the inflow of the game ball is possible at the timing when the variable pitching means is switched from one to the other of the first state to the second state. When the variable pitching means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special pitching means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level with respect to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. In addition, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved only by setting the positional relationship of the special pitching means with respect to the variable pitching means as described above.

Feature F18. The variable pitching means has a game ball that has flowed from the upstream side of the variable pitching means when the variable pitching means is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by entering the state, and the variable entry means is in the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The special ball entry means is configured to cause the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement unit is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F17, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

  According to the feature F18, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also the displacement unit responds to the first in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. Attention is paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature F19. The gaming machine according to F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature F19, when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is configured to change the state when the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to F18 or F19, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature F20, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere is present in the predetermined range. Thus, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F21. On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature F20, wherein the predetermined range exists on the specific direction side with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature F21, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the special entry means, is more on the displacement portion than the specific range where the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the front side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the second correspondence at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to a state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F22. The one state is the first state of the variable pitching means, and the other state is the second state of the variable pitching means,
The game machine according to F21, wherein a ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means is present on the specific direction side with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature F22, a game ball is triggered to enter the special ball entry means at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

  In this case, the entrance portion of the variable entrance means is located on the front side in the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, rather than a predetermined range that allows the entrance to the special entrance means in the displacement portion. Existing. Thereby, a game ball that has been placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the entrance portion of the variable entrance means enters the special entrance means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement part did not enter the variable entry means, and conversely, the profit feeling that the entry to the special entry means occurs. It can be changed.

  Feature F23. The predetermined range is a range in which there is a game ball of the next firing order at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball-entry part when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to Feature F22, wherein the gaming machine is set to.

  According to the feature F23, there is a possibility that a game ball exists in a predetermined range of the displacement portion at a timing when the game ball enters the entrance portion of the variable entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. Becomes higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the special ball entry means when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature F24. As the special entry means, a first special entry means (first special entry port 251) and a second special entry means (second special entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, wherein when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can be entered into the second special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F24, the first special entry means and the second special entry means are special entry means to be entered depending on whether the condition established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. Will be different. And the profit given to the case where a game ball enters into the 1st special entrance means differs from the case where a game ball enters into the 2nd special entrance means. As a result, the player can not only expect that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but can also enter the game ball into the special entry means with higher profit. It is expected that the condition to do is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable pitching means has a game ball that has flowed from the upstream side of the variable pitching means when the variable pitching means is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by entering the state, and the variable entry means is in the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
In the state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the range of the displacement portion, the first special ball entry means moves the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the first range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.
The second special pitching means is configured such that when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. The gaming machine according to feature F24, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the two-corresponding state.

  According to the feature F25, when a game ball is placed on the displacement portion that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. With the expectation that the portion will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion.

Feature F26. The one state is the first state of the variable pitching means, and the other state is the second state of the variable pitching means,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special entry means than a game ball enters the second special entry means,
On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range;
The game machine according to feature F25, wherein a ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature F26, a game ball is triggered to enter the special ball entry means at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

  In this case, the first predetermined range which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special entry means is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special entry means. (2) The game ball on the displacement part is located on the front side in the flow-down direction with respect to the displacement part, and the ball-entry part of the variable ball entry means is ahead of the game ball on the displacement part in the flow-down direction with respect to the first predetermined range. Exists on the side. Then, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special entry means than the game ball enters the second special entry means. Then, since the game ball present at a position closer to the entrance portion of the variable entrance means on the displacement portion becomes easier to enter the first special entrance means advantageous to the player, the variable entrance means It is possible to increase the profit for the player as the situation in which the game ball does not enter the game is strong, but the disadvantage becomes stronger.

  Feature F27. Any one of features F1 to F26, wherein when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, a game ball can enter the special ball entry means. Game machines.

  According to feature F27, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means, so that the variable ball entry means is in the first state. In this case, the player expects both the entrance of the game ball into the variable entrance means and the entrance of the game ball into the special entrance means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the situation where the variable pitching means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable pitching means is
A ball-entry unit (first grand prize port 265, second grand prize port 266) in which game balls can enter;
A game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be loaded, and the game ball loaded from the upstream side can be guided to the entrance part, and the game ball flowing down from the upstream side Guidance means (a first guidance plate 271 and a second guidance plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of the non-guidance states that are not guided to the entry ball portion;
With
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the variable pitching means is in the first state, and when the guiding means is in the non-guidance state, the variable pitching means is in the second state,
When the guide means is in the guide state, the special ball is placed at a position where a game ball placed on the guide means can flow into a different area different from the ball-entry part. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F27, characterized in that a means is provided.

  According to the feature F28, when the variable pitching means is in the first state because the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is either the variable pitching means or the special pitching means. Induced by crab. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guiding means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. Means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide start range of the guide means on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the guide means. Group 268),
The guide means is formed such that a game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to Feature F28, wherein the ball-entry portion and the separate area are present on the predetermined guidance direction side with respect to the guidance start range.

  According to the feature F29, both the ball entry part and the separate area are present on the front side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the guide means with respect to the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches the guide means. Yes. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the game ball flows down in the guiding means.

  Feature F30. The gaming machine according to Feature F29, wherein the different region is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the ball-entry portion.

  According to the feature F30, a game ball that has been placed on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed without entering the ball entering portion enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guiding means did not enter the variable entry means, and conversely, the profit feeling that the entry into the special entry means occurred. It can be changed.

Feature F31. As the variable pitching means, a first variable pitching means (first special electric prize winning device 261) and a second variable pitching means (second special electric prize winning device 262) are provided,
As the special entry means, a first special entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first variable pitching means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the first guiding means is the first ball The first special entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a first different area different from the first entry part which is the entry part of the variable entry means can enter,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second variable pitching means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the second guiding means is the second ball The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a second different area different from the second ball entry part, which is the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means, can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of features F28 to F30.

  According to the feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable entry means and the first special entry means and a combination of the second variable entry means and the second special entry means. Thereby, it becomes possible to make different the entrance ratio of the game ball to each of the variable entry means and the special entry means by making the type of the combination to be subjected to the special control in the special control state different. .

  Feature F32. The probability that the game ball placed on the first guide means in the guidance state enters the first special entry means, and the game ball placed on the second guide means in the guidance state The gaming machine according to Feature F31, wherein a probability of entering the second special entry means is different.

  According to the feature F32, it is possible to make the probability of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means different by changing the type of combination to be subjected to the special control in the special control state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R low-accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 2R high-accuracy result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball entry means that is the execution target of the special control, or the selection mode of the variable ball entry means that is the execution target of the special control. The gaming machine according to Feature F32, which is different.

  According to the feature F33, it is possible to vary the entrance probability of the game ball to the special entrance means according to the type of the special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of special control state.

  Feature F34. The game machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means in the flow-down direction of the game ball.

  According to the feature F34, since the second special entry means is provided on the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the first special entry means, the first variable entry means is subject to execution of special control. In this case, not only can the game ball enter the first special entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special entry means. Therefore, the player expects the first variable entry means to be a target for executing the special control.

  Feature F35. The same privilege is given regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special entry means or a game ball enters the second special entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F34.

  According to the feature F35, since the same privilege is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special entry means or the game ball enters the second special entry means, Regardless of which of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means is to be executed as the special control, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage felt by the player.

  Feature F36. The number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the player can use the game ball based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means. A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F35, further comprising means for increasing the number of gaming balls (function of executing the processes of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F36, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases, and even when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, The number of game balls that can be used increases. And by having the configuration of the above feature F1, not only can the game ball enter the variable ball entry means by entering the special control state, but it becomes easy to enter the ball. It is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. Acquisition corresponding entry means (abrupt gate 311) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
Information acquisition means (main CPU 63) that acquires special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special entry means, and acquires the special opportunity information when a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding entry means. 92), the function for executing the hold information acquisition process on the normal map side shown in FIG.
Triggering ball means (second operating port 34) that enters a state where a game ball can be entered based on the fact that the special opportunity information is acquired;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state occurs based on a gaming ball entering the triggering ball means.

  According to the feature F37, even when the game state is not in the special control state, the special opportunity information is acquired when the game ball enters the acquisition compatible entry means, and the special opportunity information is acquired. An opportunity to shift to the special control state is generated based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means that has entered the ball ready state. As a result, not only in the special control state but also in a predetermined gaming state, the triggering ball means can enter the ball when the special opportunity information is acquired, and the game ball enters the trigger ball means. It is possible to generate a situation in which a special control state occurs based on the above.

  Feature F38. There is a restricting means (restriction nail 312) that makes the probability of entering the game ball into the acquisition-compatible entry means lower than the probability that the game ball enters the special entry means in the special control state. A gaming machine according to Feature F37, wherein

  According to the feature F38, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition compatible entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F39. A predetermined entry means (first operation port 33) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
A transition opportunity to the special control state occurs without acquiring the special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the predetermined entry means,
The feature F38, characterized in that the restricting means makes a probability that a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding entry means lower than a probability that a game ball enters the predetermined entry means. Game machines.

  According to the feature F39, the acquisition-corresponding entrance means is more capable of entering a game ball in a predetermined game state than the predetermined entrance means in which occurrence of the game ball enters the special control state is triggered. The game ball has a lower probability of entry. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition compatible entry means in the predetermined game state.

  Feature F40. Acquisition correspondence notification is executed in a situation where the opportunity entry means enters the entry enabled state based on the fact that the special opportunity information is obtained by entering a game ball into the acquisition correspondence entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F37 to F39, comprising notification executing means (a function of executing the process of step S4413 in the main CPU 63, the display control device 82).

  According to the feature F40, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed to indicate that the entry of the game ball into the acquisition compatible entrance means and the special opportunity information is acquired, and the opportunity entry means is ready to enter. It is possible to notify the player through this. As a result, even though a game ball has entered the acquisition compatible entry means and the opportunity entry means becomes ready to enter, the game ball to the opportunity entry means is not noticed. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that the entry opportunity disappears.

  Feature F41. The notification execution means executes the acquisition correspondence notification on condition that the special opportunity information has been acquired by entering a game ball into the acquisition corresponding entrance means in a situation that is not in the special control state. The gaming machine according to Feature F40, characterized in that:

  In the special control state, it is possible that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, so it is highly likely that the player is conscious that the ball entry means will be able to enter the ball. In a predetermined game state that is not a state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, so there is a possibility that the player's consciousness that the ball entry means is ready to enter is low. In this case, according to the feature F41, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed when the special opportunity information is acquired when the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding entry means in a situation that is not in the special control state. It becomes possible to make a player's consciousness turn to the state where the entrance means is ready to enter. In addition, the acquisition correspondence notification is not executed in the special control state in which the player is highly likely to be aware that the ball entering means is ready to enter, so that the acquisition correspondence notification is not executed. It becomes possible not to become troublesome for the player.

  Feature F42. The notification execution means is configured to notify the acquisition correspondence notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by entering a game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information is not acquired. The game machine according to Feature F40 or F41, wherein the game machine is executed.

  According to the feature F42, the acquisition correspondence notification can be executed in a situation in which the player is less aware of the opportunity to enter the ball ready state.

  Feature F43. The variable entry means, the special entry means, and the acquisition corresponding entry means are provided in a region where a game ball flows down when a launch operation is performed in a predetermined mode, F37 Thru | or the game machine of any one of F42.

  According to the feature F43, by continuing the launch operation according to a predetermined mode, the game ball can be entered into the variable entry means, the game ball can be entered into the special entry means, and the acquisition corresponding entry means. It is possible to aim for the entry of game balls.

  Feature F44. The trigger ball means is provided at a position where it is easier for the game ball to reach the trigger ball means when the shot operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shot operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to Feature F43, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature F44, when the triggering ball means enters the ball ready state in a situation that is not in the special control state, the launch operation is performed in a specific manner, so that the game ball can enter the triggering ball means. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a sphere.

Feature F45. An opportunity entry means (second operation port 34) that enables entry of a game ball based on the game ball entering the special entry means;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for executing grant determination based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball means;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant response result, the game state after the end of the special control state is referred to as the game state before the start of the special control state. Means (functions for executing the processing of step S1904 and step S1905 in the main CPU 63) capable of different gaming states;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the second grant correspondence result, the special control means shifts to a predetermined game state in which the special control is executed, and the game state after the end of the predetermined game state is Means for maintaining the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state is executed (function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F44, wherein a probability that the result of the grant determination is the second grant correspondence result is higher than a probability of the first grant correspondence result.

  According to the feature F45, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only the first grant correspondence result can be obtained but also the second grant correspondence result can be obtained, and the probability of the second grant correspondence result is higher. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the variable pitching means to be in the first state by causing the game balls to enter the trigger pitching means. In this case, with the configuration of the feature F1 described above, the configuration is such that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, and the variable ball entry means triggered by the occurrence of the special control state. It is possible to create a situation in which there are more opportunities to enter the first state.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F45, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball is difficult to enter A variable pitching means provided so as to be switchable to each of the second states (the special electric prize device 32 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric prize device 261 and the second in the fifteenth embodiment). Special prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing the special control for setting the variable pitching means to the second state after the first state (the special-side open setting process and the special electric close setting process in the main CPU 63 are executed) Function)
Special ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first through gate 263 and second through gate in the fifteenth embodiment) Gate 264);
An opportunity entry means (second operation port 34) that enters a state in which a game ball can enter based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entry means;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for executing grant determination based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball means;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant response result, the special control is executed (the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result) and the special control is executed. Means capable of setting the gaming state after the end of the control state to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the special control state (function for executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined gaming state in which the special control by the special control means is executed based on the result of the grant determination being a second grant response result (open / close execution mode triggered by a small hit result) And a means for maintaining the gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state in the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state is executed (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63),
With
In the grant determination, the probability of being the second grant correspondence result is higher than the probability of being the first grant correspondence result,
A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which a game ball can enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation.

  According to the feature G1, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only the first grant response result can be obtained but also the second grant response result, and the probability of the second grant response result is higher. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment correspondence result. Thereby, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable pitching means to be in the first state by generating a game ball entering the trigger pitching means. In this case, it is possible to enter the special entry means that causes the opportunity entry means to enter the available state in a predetermined situation. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball means expects the occurrence of a predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G2. The game according to Feature G1, wherein the frequency at which the opportunity entry means enters the entry enabled state with respect to the entry of the game ball into the special entry means is constant regardless of the game state. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, the frequency at which the triggering ball means is allowed to enter the game in response to the game ball entering the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. The expected value at which a special control is executed after the ball has entered does not vary depending on the gaming state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it is difficult to give inflection to the game. On the other hand, since the structure of the feature G1 is provided and the game ball can be inserted into the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to give an inflection to the game.

Feature G3. A predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
The grant determination means executes the grant determination based on a game ball entering the trigger ball entering means, and executes the grant determination based on a game ball entering the predetermined pitch entry means. And
A high probability state and a low probability state are set so that the probability of the first grant correspondence result in the grant determination is relatively high and low as the state in which the grant determination unit performs the grant determination,
The gaming machine controls the game times execution means so that the game turning operation is started when the operation continuation period has elapsed and the game turning operation is ended when the grant determination is performed. Time control means (function for executing special figure change start process, special figure change process and special figure determination process in the main CPU 63),
Period determining means for determining the operation continuation period (function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
With
The period determining means is the game rotation operation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the game ball entering the trigger ball means in the low probability state, and the grant determination result is the The grant determination executed when the average period of the operation continuation period of the game turning motion when the first grant response result is not obtained is based on the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance means in the low probability state. The game turn action that is triggered, and when the result of the grant determination is not the first grant response result, is the same, substantially the same or less than the average period of the action duration of the game turn action. Is a configuration to
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation different from a situation where the grant determination is performed in the low probability state.

  According to the feature G3, it is the operation for game rotation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the trigger ball means in the low probability state, and the result of the grant determination is the first grant corresponding result If the average period of the operation continuation period of the game rotation operation in the case of not being a low probability state is a game rotation operation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, When the result of the grant determination is not the first grant correspondence result, it is the same, substantially the same as or less than the average duration of the operation continuation period of the game turning operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rate of digestion of the former game-use operation from becoming extremely worse than that of the latter game-use operation. However, with this configuration, as in feature G2, the configuration is such that the frequency at which the triggering ball entry means is ready for entering the game ball entering the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. If it is, it is assumed that the game is performed aiming at the entry of the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means in a low probability state. On the other hand, in a situation where the determination of grant is performed in the low probability state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to play a game aiming for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means.

  Feature G4. Characteristic G1 to G1, wherein the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

  According to the characteristic G4, by continuing the launch operation according to a predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game to the opportunity ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim at the entrance of the ball.

  Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G5, it is possible not only to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by shifting to a state in which the special control is executed, or to easily enter the game, but also to play the special ball entry means. A ball can be entered. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the profit of shifting to the state in which special control is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G6. The gaming machine according to Feature G5, characterized in that a gaming ball can be inserted into the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G6, even if the state shifts to a state in which the special control is executed, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition is satisfied separately from the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in a state where the special control is executed, and the game in the state where the special control is executed It is possible to improve the interest of

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the ease of entering a game ball into the special ball entry means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

  According to the feature G7, a game in which a game ball is expected to enter the special ball entry means due to a difference in the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means between the special control state and the predetermined game state. A person expects the occurrence of a state in which a game ball easily enters the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. When the variable pitching means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special pitching means,
The gaming machine of feature G7, wherein the number of times that the special control is executed is different between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature G8, when the variable pitching means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special pitching means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player should pay attention to in the state where the special control is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state where the special control is executed.

  In this case, the number of times of switching of the state in the variable pitching means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state. As a result, the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is special. It is expected that the execution state of the special control that is likely to cause the game ball to enter the ball entry means is generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G9. The game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side in the first corresponding state is placed and the game ball is prevented from flowing in a predetermined direction, and the game ball is moved in the predetermined direction by entering the second response state. And a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that can flow down to
The special ball entry means is configured to cause the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement unit is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

  According to the feature G9, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special entry means. Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement part, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is configured to change the state when the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state but also the game on which the game ball is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere is present in the predetermined range. Thereby, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G11. On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature G10, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature G11, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the special entry means, is more on the displacement portion than the specific range where the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the front side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the second correspondence at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to a state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G12. The target entrance means which is one of the variable entrance means and another entrance means,
A ball-entry unit (first grand prize port 265, second grand prize port 266) in which game balls can enter;
A game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be loaded, and the game ball loaded from the upstream side can be guided to the entrance part, and the game ball flowing down from the upstream side Guidance means (a first guidance plate 271 and a second guidance plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of the non-guidance states that are not guided to the entry ball portion;
With
When the guide means is in the guide state, the special ball is placed at a position where a game ball placed on the guide means can flow into a different area different from the ball-entry part. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that a means is provided.

  According to the feature G12, when the guide means is in the guide state, the game ball placed on the guide means is guided to either the entrance part of the target entrance means or the special entrance means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guiding means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G13. Means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide start range of the guide means upstream of the guide means in the flow direction of the game balls. Group 268),
The guide means is formed such that a game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to Feature G12, wherein the ball-entry portion and the separate area are present on the predetermined guidance direction side with respect to the guidance start range.

  According to the feature G13, both the entrance portion and the separate area that allows entry into the special entry means are more in the guidance means than in the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches the guidance means. It exists on the front side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the game ball flows down in the guiding means.

  Feature G14. The gaming machine according to Feature G13, wherein the separate area is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the entrance portion.

  According to the feature G14, a game ball that has been placed on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed without entering the ball entering portion enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guiding means has not entered the entrance portion is changed to a profit feeling that the special entry means has entered. It becomes possible.

Feature G15. As the target entry means, a first target entry means (first special electricity prize device 261) and a second target entry means (second special electricity prize device 262) are provided,
As the special entry means, a first special entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first target entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the first guiding means, the first ball The first special entrance means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a first different area different from the first entrance part that is the entrance part of the target entrance means can enter,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second target entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the second guiding means is the second ball The second special entrance means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a second different area different from the second entrance part, which is the entrance part of the target entrance means, can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of features G12 to G14.

  According to the feature G15, there is a combination of the first target entrance means and the first special entrance means and a combination of the second target entrance means and the second special entrance means. Thereby, by making the types of combinations to be subjected to the guidance control different in the state where the guidance control is executed, the percentage of game balls entering the target entrance means and the special entry means is made different. Is possible.

  Feature G16. The probability that the game ball placed on the first guide means in the guidance state enters the first special entry means, and the game ball placed on the second guide means in the guidance state The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein a probability of entering the second special entry means is different.

  According to the feature G16, it is possible to make the entrance probability of the game ball into the special entry means different by changing the type of combination that is the execution target of the induction control in the state where the induction control is executed. . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the guidance control.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to Feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special entry means is provided downstream of the first special entry means in the flow direction of the game ball.

  According to the feature G17, since the second special entry means is provided downstream of the first special entry means in the flow direction of the game ball, the first target entry means is the execution target of the special control. In this case, not only can the game ball enter the first special entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special entry means. Therefore, the player expects the first target entry means to be an execution target of guidance control.

  Feature G18. The same privilege is given regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special entry means or a game ball enters the second special entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17.

  According to the feature G18, the same privilege is given regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special entry means and a game ball enters the second special entry means. Regardless of which of the first target entry means and the second target entry means is the guidance control execution target, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage felt by the player.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G18, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. The game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side in the first corresponding state is placed and the game ball is prevented from flowing in a predetermined direction, and the game ball is moved in the predetermined direction by entering the second response state. A displacement portion (induction plate portion 214) that can flow down to
In a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, so that the game ball flows in Special entrance means provided at a position where the first entrance entrance is possible (through gate 35 in the first to 13th and 18th embodiments, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance in the 14th embodiment. 252, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special entry means. Thereby, the player will pay attention to whether or not the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, and to improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Feature H2. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is configured to change the state when the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature H2, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere is present in the predetermined range. Thereby, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H3. On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to claim H2, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature H3, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the special entry means, is more on the displacement portion than the specific range where the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the front side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the second correspondence at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to a state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the predetermined entrance portion (entrance portion 45b) is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature H4, the predetermined entrance portion is located on the front side in the flow-down direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, rather than the predetermined range that allows the special entrance means to enter the displacement portion. doing. As a result, game balls that have been placed on the displacement part but have not reached the predetermined entry part enter the special entry means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement portion has not entered the predetermined entrance portion, conversely, the sense of profit that the entrance to the special entry means occurs It becomes possible to change to.

  Feature H5. In the predetermined range, when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined launch cycle, there is a game ball of the next firing order at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined entrance part. The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is set within a certain range.

  According to the feature H5, there is a high possibility that a game ball is present in a predetermined range of the displacement portion at a timing when the game ball enters the predetermined entrance portion and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the special ball entry means when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature H6. As the special entry means, a first special entry means (first special entry port 251) and a second special entry means (second special entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
In the state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the range of the displacement portion, the first special ball entry means moves the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the first range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.
The second special pitching means is configured such that when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. 2. Any one of Features H1 to H5, wherein the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in when the game ball is switched to the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the corresponding state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H6, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. With the expectation that the portion will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion.

Feature H7. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special entry means than a game ball enters the second special entry means,
On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range;
The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the predetermined entrance portion exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature H7, the first predetermined range which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special entry means is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special entry means. The game ball is present on the displacement side in the flow-down direction on the displacement part with respect to the second predetermined range, and the game entry part on the displacement part is in the flow-down direction on the displacement part with respect to the first predetermined range. Exists. Then, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special entry means than the game ball enters the second special entry means. If it does so, since the game ball which exists in the position close | similar to a predetermined | prescribed entrance part on a displacement part becomes easier to enter the 1st special entrance means advantageous to a player, It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the disadvantage that the game ball has not entered becomes stronger.

  Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion are set.

  According to the feature H8, since a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement unit are set, there are a plurality of types of predetermined situations in which the frequency of entering the special entry means is different.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball is difficult to enter The variable pitching means provided so as to be switchable to each of the second states (the special electric prize device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric prize device 261 and the second in the fifteenth embodiment). Special prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing the special control for setting the variable pitching means to the second state after the first state (the special-side open setting process and the special electric close setting process in the main CPU 63 are executed) Function)
Transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing a special figure determining process in the main CPU 63);
In a predetermined gaming state that is not in the special control state, the entry of game balls is restricted, and special entry means (first special entry port 251 and second entrance) that allow entry of game balls in the special control state. Special entrance 252),
The number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the player can use the game ball based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means. Means for increasing the number of game balls (function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can be easily or easily entered into the variable ball entry means, and the game ball into the special ball entry means is also provided. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the player uses it. The number of possible game balls increases. And by providing the above-mentioned structure, it is possible not only to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by changing the game state to the special control state, but also to make it easy to enter the ball. The game ball can enter the means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

  Feature I2. The special ball entry means is downstream of the variable ball entry means in the flow direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where a gaming ball can flow in at a timing of switching to.

  According to the feature I2, when the variable pitching means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball that has not entered the variable pitching means may enter the special pitching means. It becomes possible. As a result, the game balls leaked as the entry target of the variable entry means enter the special entry means, and the number of available game balls increases when the game balls enter the special entry means. Thus, it is possible to suppress a player's disadvantageous feeling that a game ball leaking from a target to be entered by the variable pitching means is generated.

Feature I3. The variable pitching means has a game ball that has flowed from the upstream side of the variable pitching means when the variable pitching means is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by entering the state, and the variable entry means is in the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The special ball entry means is configured to cause the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement unit is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

  According to the feature I3, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also the displacement unit responds to the first in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. Attention is paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to claim I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable pitching means, and the other state is the second state of the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature I4, a game ball is triggered to enter the special ball entry means at a timing when the variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is configured to change the state when the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement unit. The gaming machine according to I3 or I4, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the characteristic I5, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere is present in the predetermined range. Thus, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I6. On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to claim I5, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the characteristic I6, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the special entry means, is more on the displacement portion than the specific range where the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the front side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the second correspondence at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to a state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I7. The one state is the first state of the variable pitching means, and the other state is the second state of the variable pitching means,
The game machine according to I6, wherein a ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature I7, a game ball is triggered to enter the special ball entry means at the timing when the variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

  In this case, the entrance portion of the variable entrance means is located on the front side in the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, rather than a predetermined range that allows the entrance to the special entrance means in the displacement portion. Existing. Thereby, a game ball that has been placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the entrance portion of the variable entrance means enters the special entrance means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement part did not enter the variable entry means, and conversely, the profit feeling that the entry to the special entry means occurs. It can be changed.

  Feature I8. The predetermined range is a range in which there is a game ball of the next firing order at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball-entry part when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to Feature I7, wherein

  According to the feature I8, there is a possibility that a game ball exists in a predetermined range of the displacement portion at a timing when the game ball enters the entrance portion of the variable entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. Becomes higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the special ball entry means when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature I9. As the special entry means, a first special entry means (first special entry port 251) and a second special entry means (second special entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entry means (function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
With
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I8, wherein when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can be entered into the second special ball entry means.

  According to the characteristic I9, the first special entry means and the second special entry means are special entry means to be entered depending on whether the condition established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. Will be different. And the profit given to the case where a game ball enters into the 1st special entrance means differs from the case where a game ball enters into the 2nd special entrance means. As a result, the player can not only expect that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but can also enter the game ball into the special entry means with higher profit. It is expected that the condition to do is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable pitching means has a game ball that has flowed from the upstream side of the variable pitching means when the variable pitching means is in a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by entering the state, and the variable entry means is in the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction;
The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
In the state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the range of the displacement portion, the first special ball entry means moves the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the first range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.
The second special pitching means is configured such that when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is moved from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. 2. The gaming machine according to Feature I9, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball is flowed down in the predetermined direction when switching to the two-corresponding state.

  According to the feature I10, when a game ball is placed on the displacement portion that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a situation where it is possible to enter the special entry means with higher profit. With the expectation that the portion will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable pitching means, and the other state is the second state of the variable pitching means,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special entry means than a game ball enters the second special entry means,
On the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement portion, there is provided means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range;
The game machine according to I10, wherein a ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature I11, a game ball entering opportunity into the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. Thereby, not only when the variable pitching means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state, it is possible to increase the player's attention.

  In this case, the first predetermined range which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special entry means is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special entry means. (2) The game ball on the displacement part is located on the front side in the flow-down direction with respect to the displacement part, and the ball-entry part of the variable ball entry means is ahead of the game ball on the displacement part in the flow-down direction with respect to the first predetermined range. Exists on the side. Then, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first special entry means than the game ball enters the second special entry means. Then, since the game ball present at a position closer to the entrance portion of the variable entrance means on the displacement portion becomes easier to enter the first special entrance means advantageous to the player, the variable entrance means It is possible to increase the profit for the player as the situation in which the game ball does not enter the game is strong, but the disadvantage becomes stronger.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I11, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball is difficult to enter The variable pitching means provided so as to be switchable to each of the second states (the special electric prize device 32 in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric prize device 261 and the second in the fifteenth embodiment). Special prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing the special control for setting the variable pitching means to the second state after the first state (the special-side open setting process and the special electric close setting process in the main CPU 63 are executed) Function)
Transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing a special figure determining process in the main CPU 63);
Special entry means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments) that restricts the entry of game balls in a predetermined game state and enables the entry of game balls in a game state that is not the predetermined game state. In the fourteenth embodiment, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment,
Acquisition corresponding entry means (abrupt gate 311) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
Based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means, it is possible to enter the game ball, and the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means based on the game ball entering. Triggering ball entry means (second operation port 34) that allows a ball to enter the ball ready to enter,
With
A gaming machine, characterized in that an opportunity to shift to the special control state is generated based on a game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means.

  According to the feature J1, the entry into the special entry means that causes the opportunity for the opportunity entry means to enter is possible in a game state that is not a predetermined game state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the opportunity ball means expects a game state that is not a predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, even if it is a predetermined game state, the opportunity entry means can enter the game based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding entry means. Then, an opportunity to shift to the special control state is generated based on the fact that the game ball has entered the opportunity entry means that is ready to enter. As a result, not only in a predetermined gaming state but also in a predetermined gaming state, the triggering ball means becomes ready to enter, and a special control state is generated based on the game ball entering the triggering ball means. It is possible to cause a situation to occur.

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the special control state is included in a gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, the game state shifts to the special control state, so that the game ball can be entered or easily entered into the variable ball entry means, and the game ball into the special ball entry means. Can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature J3. Restriction means (restriction) that causes the probability of the game ball to enter the acquisition corresponding entry means to be lower than the probability that the game ball enters the special entry means in a game state that is not the predetermined game state. A gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2, further comprising a nail 312).

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to reduce the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition compatible entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature J4. A predetermined entry means (first operation port 33) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entry means, a transition opportunity to the special control state occurs,
The restricting means makes the probability of entering a game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means lower than the probability that a game ball enters the predetermined entry means, according to the feature J3. Game machines.

  According to the feature J4, the acquisition corresponding entry means rather than the predetermined entry means that allows the entry of the game ball in the predetermined game state and the occurrence of the entry of the game ball triggers the transition to the special control state. Has a lower probability of entering a game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition compatible entry means in the predetermined game state.

  Feature J5. Notification executing means (main-side CPU 63) for executing acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the ball entering means is in a state where the entry is possible based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding entry means. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, further comprising a display control device 82) that executes the process of step S4413 in FIG.

  According to the feature J5, it is possible to notify the player through the execution of the acquisition correspondence notification that the game ball has entered the acquisition correspondence entry means and that the opportunity entry means is ready to enter. It becomes. As a result, even though a game ball has entered the acquisition compatible entry means and the opportunity entry means becomes ready to enter, the game ball to the opportunity entry means is not noticed. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that the entry opportunity disappears.

  Feature J6. The said notification execution means performs the said acquisition corresponding | compatible notification on condition that the game ball entered into the said acquisition corresponding | compatible entrance means in the said predetermined | prescribed game state, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. Game machines.

  In a game state that is not a predetermined game state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means, so there is a possibility that the player's consciousness is suitable for the opportunity ball entry means to enter the ball ready state. Although it is high, there is a possibility that the player's consciousness that the entrance ball means becomes in a state in which the entrance ball can enter is low because the entry of the game ball into the special entry means does not occur in a predetermined game state. In this case, according to the feature J6, since the acquisition correspondence notification is executed on the condition that the game ball has entered the acquisition compatible entry means in a predetermined game state, It becomes possible to turn the player's consciousness toward becoming. In addition, the acquisition correspondence notification is not executed in a gaming state that is not a predetermined gaming state where the player's consciousness is likely to be suitable for the ball entering means to enter the ball ready state. It is possible to prevent the execution of the correspondence notification from becoming troublesome for the player.

Feature J7. Means for acquiring special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the special entry means, and acquiring the special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding entry means; ,
The opportunity entry means is configured to enter the entry state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information.
The notification execution means is configured to notify the acquisition correspondence notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by entering a game ball into the acquisition corresponding entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information is not acquired. The game machine according to Feature J5 or J6, wherein the game machine is executed.

  According to the feature J7, the acquisition correspondence notification can be executed in a situation in which the player is less aware of the opportunity to enter the ball ready state.

  Feature J8. The variable entry means, the special entry means, and the acquisition corresponding entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the launch operation is performed in a predetermined manner. Thru | or the game machine of any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, by continuing the launch operation according to a predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry means. It is possible to aim for the entry of game balls.

  Feature J9. The trigger ball means is provided at a position where it is easier for the game ball to reach the trigger ball means when the shot operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shot operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to Feature J8, wherein

  According to the feature J9, when the triggering ball means enters the ball ready state in a predetermined gaming state, the launching operation is performed in a specific manner, so that the gaming ball enters the triggering ball means. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a profit is given to a player by shifting a gaming state to a special control state based on a predetermined transition condition being established.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special control state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball entering a part. And when it transfers to a special control state, for example, opening and closing of the entrance device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the entrance to the entrance device concerned.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball is difficult to enter A first variable pitching means (first special prize winning device 291) provided to be switchable to each of the second states;
A first state provided downstream of the first variable entry means, allowing a game ball to enter or allowing a game ball to enter easily and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or a game ball is difficult to enter A second variable pitching means (second special prize winning device 292) provided to be switchable to each of
In the unit control state, unit control means for controlling so that a period in which both of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are in the first state occurs (FIG. 85 (a) in the main CPU 63). A function for executing the opening setting process for special electricity shown in FIG. 5 and a function for executing the closing setting process for special electricity shown in FIG.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic K1, the game ball that has failed to enter the first variable entry means that is in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable entry means that is in the first state. This makes it easier for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. Means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed a plurality of times (function to execute a special figure determining process in the main CPU 63);
When the unit control state of one execution time ends, the game ball that started to flow from the position of the first variable entry means toward the second variable entry means is the unit control state of the next execution time. The game machine according to claim K1, wherein the game machine is configured to enter the second variable entry means in the first state.

  According to the feature K2, a game ball that has not been able to enter the first variable entry means despite having reached the position of the first variable entry means at the timing when the unit control state ends. In the unit control state of the next execution time, the second variable entry means is entered. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the variable entry means despite the launch operation aiming at entry of the game balls into the variable entry means in the special control state.

  Feature K3. The unit control means controls so that both the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are in the first state when the unit control state is started. A gaming machine according to K1 or K2.

  According to the feature K3, when the unit control state is started, both the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are controlled so as to be in the first state. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the timing for entering the first state is individually set. Also, a game ball that has leaked into the first variable entry means in one execution unit control state can enter the second variable entry means in the next execution unit control state.

  Feature K4. The unit control means is configured such that when the unit control state is started, both the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are in the first state, and when the unit control state ends, The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein both the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are controlled to be in the second state.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable pitching means in the unit control state. In addition, according to the present configuration, the target of the game ball entering in the unit control state is basically the first variable entry means, while entering the first variable entry means in the unit control state for one execution time. The game ball that has leaked can enter the second variable entry means in the next execution unit control state.

Feature K5. Means for shifting the gaming state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed a plurality of times (function to execute a special figure determination process in the main CPU 63);
The period from the end of the unit control state of one execution time in the special control state to the start of the unit control state of the next execution time is from the position of the first variable entry means to the second. The gaming machine according to the feature K3 or K4, characterized in that it is shorter than a period required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature K5, a game ball that has leaked into the first variable entry means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable entry means in the unit control state of the next execution time. It becomes. Further, a configuration for making it difficult for such a ball leakage to occur can be realized by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are configured to allow a game ball flowing down a predetermined game area to enter,
The first variable pitching means is configured such that when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, a game ball flowing down the predetermined game area is guided to a pitching portion of the first variable pitching means. The feature K5 includes a first displacement portion (the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291) for preventing the game ball from flowing toward the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature K6, it is possible to prevent the game ball from leaking into the first variable ball entry means when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state. In addition, since the configuration of the feature K5 is provided, even if a leakage of entry into the first variable entry means occurs at the end timing of one execution unit control state, the game ball is changed to the second variable. Easy to enter the entrance means. Therefore, it is difficult to cause a leakage of entry into the variable entry means in the special control state.

  Feature K7. The second variable pitching means is a game ball that flows down the predetermined game area when the second variable pitching means is in the first state, and flows into the downstream side of the first variable pitching means. The second displacement portion (second special prize winning device 292) that prevents the game ball from flowing into the downstream side of the second variable ball entry means is guided to the ball entry portion of the second variable ball entry means. The game machine according to feature K6, characterized in that it has a guide plate portion 214).

  According to the feature K7, even if a leakage of entry into the first variable entry means occurs at the end timing of one execution unit control state, the game ball enters the second variable entry means. It will be.

  Feature K8. A blocking state that is provided downstream of the first variable pitching means and upstream of the second variable pitching means, and prevents a game ball flowing down from the upstream side from flowing further downstream; Any one of the features K1 to K7, further comprising blocking means (flow-preventing member 303) provided so as to be switchable between a non-blocking state in which the inflow of the game ball to the downstream side is not blocked. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the characteristic K8, even if a ball leakage to the first variable ball entry means occurs, it is possible to prevent the leaked game ball from flowing into the downstream side by the prevention means. Then, when the second variable entry means is in the first state, the blocking means is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, so that the game ball whose inflow to the downstream side is blocked by the blocking state is reduced. It is possible to enter the second variable entry means.

  Feature K9. The blocking means is in the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable pitching means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable pitching means is in the second state. A blocking control unit (a function of executing a flow blocking control process in the main CPU 63) that causes the blocking unit to enter the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the state is switched to the first state. The gaming machine according to Feature K8, wherein:

  According to the feature K9, since the blocking means is in the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable pitching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the first variable pitching means is It becomes possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball that has entered and leaked from the first variable ball entry means to the further downstream side at the timing when the state is switched from the first state to the second state. Then, since the blocking means is in the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the second variable ball entering means is switched from the second state to the first state, the game ball blocked by the blocking means is the second variable It will enter the entrance means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the leakage of entering the variable entry means by the prevention means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a profit is given to a player by shifting a gaming state to a special control state based on a predetermined transition condition being established.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special control state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry There is known a configuration in which a special control state is entered based on a game ball entering a part. And when it transfers to a special control state, for example, opening and closing of the entrance device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the entrance to the entrance device concerned.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the execution mode of the special control state suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes gaming components arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion among the gaming components.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Special prize winning device, 33 ... 1st operation port, 34 ... 2nd operation port, 35 ... Through gate, 45b ... Entrance part, 63 ... Main side CPU, 82 ... Display control device, 214 ... Guidance Plate part, 241 ... guide nail group, 251 ... first special entrance port, 252 ... second special entrance port, 261 ... first special electricity prize device, 262 ... second special electricity prize device, 263 ... first through gate, 264 ... 2nd through gate, 265 ... 1st grand prize opening, 266 ... 2nd big prize opening, 267 ... 1st guide nail group, 268 ... 2nd guide nail group, 271 ... 1st guide plate, 281 ... 2nd Guide plate, 291 ... 1st special electricity prize winning device, 292 ... 2nd special electricity prize winning device, 303 ... Flow-off prevention member, 311 ... Sudden gate, 312 ... Restriction nail, PA ... Game area.

Claims (8)

The game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side in the first corresponding state is placed and the game ball is prevented from flowing in a predetermined direction, and the game ball is moved in the predetermined direction by entering the second response state. A displacement portion that allows flow down to
In a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, so that the game ball flows in Special entrance means provided at a position where
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means is configured to change the state when the displacement unit switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement unit. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction. A means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement unit on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement unit,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the predetermined pitching portion is present on the specific direction side with respect to the predetermined range.   In the predetermined range, when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined launch cycle, there is a game ball of the next firing order at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined entrance part. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is set in a certain range. A first special entry means and a second special entry means are provided as the special entry means,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special entry means;
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entry means;
With
The first special pitching means switches the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion. The game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.
The second special pitching means switches the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction. The displacement portion is formed such that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
It is more advantageous for a player that a game ball enters the first special entry means than a game ball enters the second special entry means,
A means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement unit on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the displacement unit,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range;
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the predetermined pitching portion exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.   The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement unit are set.

Images